‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪.I‬‬ ‫‪play‬‬ ‫‪we play‬‬

‫‪You play‬‬ ‫‪You play‬‬

‫‪He‬‬
‫‪She plays‬‬ ‫‪They play‬‬
‫‪It‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺣـﺮﻑ »‪ «s‬ﻳـﺎ‪ « es‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ »‪ «s‬ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪come‬‬ ‫‪we‬‬ ‫‪go‬‬ ‫‪They‬‬ ‫‪eat‬‬

‫↓‬ ‫↓‬ ‫↓‬
‫‪He‬‬ ‫‪come‬‬ ‫‪she‬‬ ‫‪goes‬‬ ‫‪Ali‬‬ ‫‪eats‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »‪ «Do‬ﻳﺎ »‪ « Does‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Do‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪go‬‬ ‫‪Do‬‬ ‫‪we‬‬ ‫‪go‬‬
‫‪Do‬‬ ‫‪You go‬‬ ‫‪Do‬‬ ‫‪you‬‬ ‫‪go‬‬

‫‪He‬‬
‫‪Does‬‬ ‫‪She‬‬ ‫‪go‬‬ ‫‪Do‬‬ ‫‪they‬‬ ‫‪go‬‬
‫‪It‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Do‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷـﺨﺺ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﺎ ‪ Does‬ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ‪ Does‬ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ s‬ﻳﺎ ‪ es‬ﺍﺯﺁﺧﺮﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪She speaks‬‬ ‫?‪Does she speak‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﻣﻨﻔﻲﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ» ‪doesn't‬ﻳﺎ‪ «don't‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪I wash‬‬ ‫‪I don't wash‬‬

‫‪١‬‬
He cleans He doesn't clean.
.‫ ﺍﺯﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬es‫ ﻳﺎ‬s‫ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬doesn't‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ‬
:‫ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬:(‫ﻃﺮﺯﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ )ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
sometime-usually –always-often-rarely-seldom-
-never-generally-occasionally-hardly-barely
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
:‫ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
every night-every day-once a week-twice a week

.‫ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﺯﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

every+000 ‫ﺳﺎﻝ‬/ ‫ﻣﺎﻩ‬/‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
every day every morning

They wash this car every week .(to wash) wash

He walks to school every morning.(to walk) walks
Do you visit him every day?(to visit) Do-visit
Does she come here by bus every day?(to come) Does- come
You don't cook lunch at home every Monday.(not to cook) don, cook

am
‫ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬+is+ ‫ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ing ‫ﻓﻌﻞ‬ :‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
are

I am playing we are playing

You are playing You are playing

He
She is playing They are playing
It
. ‫ ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬to be ‫ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬: ‫ﻃﺮﺯﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
He is coming Is he coming?

٢
 . ‫ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬to be ‫ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬not ‫ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬: ‫ﻃﺮﺯﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
We are talking we aren't talking.
Now –at present ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‬: ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
At the moment – right now-just-sor the ting being

We ……our house now.(to clean) are cleaning

Reza …in the pool now .(to swim) is swimming
At present they….to the music.(to listen) are listening

Have
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬+ + ‫ (ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬P.P) :(‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ)ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ‬
Has

I have played we have played

You have played You have played

He
She has played They have played
It

.‫ ﺭﺍﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ‬have ‫ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﺟﺎﻱ‬:‫ﻃﺮﺯﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

He has bought a car Has he thought a car ?
. ‫ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬have ‫ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ‬not ‫ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬: ‫ﻃﺮﺯﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

We have seen her we haven't seen her.

:‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺪﺍﺯ‬: ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
so far ( ‫ )ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ – ﺩﺭﺁﺧﺮﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬since( ‫ )ﺍﺯ –ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬just(have, has‫)ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬
yet ( ‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭﺁﺧﺮﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬-‫ )ﻫﻨﻮﺯ‬already ( have, has‫) ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬
lately ,recently, ,even ( ‫ ﺩﺭﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ‬-ً‫ )ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ‬never ( ‫)ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ – ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬
(‫)ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ – ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬

٣
‫)‪She ….….here since last year.(to live‬‬ ‫‪has lived‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﻭﻗﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ since‬ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﻣﺎﺿـﻲ ﻧﻘﻠـﻲ ﻭﺩﻭﻣـﻲ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪ last‬ﻛـﻪ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)‪We…..lunch yet .(not to cook‬‬ ‫‪haven't cooked.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫)‪We……lunch yet.(to cook‬‬ ‫‪haven't cooked‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ yet‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪+ have,has+ been+ ing‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ) ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ (‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‪be fore-never-ever-so far-up to now-as yet –recently-lately-times- :‬‬

‫‪twice‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺜﺮﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻭﺣـﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ ‪ since، for‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺩﻭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭﺗﺴﺘﻲ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻋﻨﺪ‪ -1 :‬ﺑﺎﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺷﺎﻥ »‪ «ed‬ﻳﺎ »‪ «d‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Work‬‬ ‫‪worked‬‬ ‫‪play‬‬ ‫‪played‬‬
‫‪Live‬‬ ‫‪lived‬‬ ‫‪arrive‬‬ ‫‪arrived‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪See‬‬ ‫‪saw‬‬ ‫‪go‬‬ ‫‪went‬‬
‫‪ed‬‬ ‫‪wash‬‬ ‫‪washed‬‬
‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪arrive‬‬ ‫‪arrived‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪I played‬‬ ‫‪we played‬‬
‫‪You played‬‬ ‫‪You played‬‬
‫‪He‬‬
‫‪She played‬‬ ‫‪They played‬‬
‫‪It‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻬﺎ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »‪ «Did‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺩﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺮﮔـﺎﻩ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »‪ «Did‬ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪She worked‬‬ ‫?‪Did she work‬‬
‫‪They went‬‬ ‫?‪Did they go‬‬
‫‪I came‬‬ ‫?‪Did you come‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Does، Do‬ﻳﺎ‪ Did‬ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪They see‬‬ ‫?‪Do they see‬‬
‫‪He sees‬‬ ‫?‪Does he see‬‬
‫‪She saw‬‬ ‫?‪Did she see‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ »‪ « didn't‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪She worked‬‬ ‫‪she didn't work.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ 3‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻳﺮﻭﺯ‪ – yesterday:‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ – last :‬ﻗﺒﻞ‪ago :‬‬
‫)‪We……..the letters yesterday.(to post‬‬ ‫‪posted‬‬
‫)‪…….she….you last month?(to help‬‬ ‫‪Did-help‬‬
‫)‪Ali ….his car two weeks ago.(not to sell‬‬ ‫‪didn't sell‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ‪ + was +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪were‬‬

‫‪I was playing‬‬ ‫‪we were playing‬‬

‫‪You were playing‬‬ ‫‪You were playing‬‬
‫‪He‬‬
‫‪She was playing‬‬ ‫‪They were playing‬‬
‫‪It‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﺭﺍﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪They were writing‬‬ ‫?‪were they writing‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ not‬ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪She was walking‬‬ ‫‪she wasn't walking.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺳﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ) ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ( ‪) while‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ( ‪) when‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ( ‪as‬‬
‫‪at…o'clock‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫‪Week‬‬
‫‪at this time last‬‬ ‫‪Month‬‬
‫‪year‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﻮﺩﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺩﻳﮕـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪1-‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪2-‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪When I arrived at school, they were playing football.‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬
‫)‪She came here while I…………..(to sleep‬‬ ‫‪was sleeping‬‬

‫)‪As he was crossing the street, I….him.(to see‬‬ ‫‪saw‬‬

‫ﻭﻧﻴﺰﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ ﮔﻔﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪+‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪when+‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪while+‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+when+‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪+while+‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫)‪( P.P‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪+Had+‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ(‪:‬‬

‫‪We had played‬‬

‫‪I had played‬‬
‫‪You had played‬‬
‫‪You had played‬‬
‫‪He‬‬ ‫‪They had played‬‬
‫‪She had played‬‬
‫‪It‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ had‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪She had visited us‬‬ ‫? ‪had she visited us‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ not‬ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ had‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪We had worked hard‬‬ ‫‪we hadn't worked hard‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‪1- before‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‪2-After‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻧﻴﺰﺩﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‪1-‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪2-‬‬

‫‪They had left the house before I knew‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﻣﺎ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫)‪After she …..the car, I called her .(to sell‬‬ ‫‪had sold‬‬
‫)‪We had posted the books before she ……(to come‬‬ ‫‪came‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪+ had+been+ ing‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ً ﺑﺎﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪...) -2‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪+‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ ( for‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ after, before‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪+ will+‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪:‬‬

‫‪We will play‬‬ ‫‪I will play‬‬

‫‪You will play‬‬ ‫‪you will play‬‬
‫‪He‬‬
‫‪She will play‬‬ ‫‪They will play‬‬
‫‪It‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺷـﺨﺺ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ ‪ s‬ﻳـﺎ‪es‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪He comes‬‬ ‫‪He will come.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :2:‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ will‬ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻧﻴﺰﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪I will‬‬ ‫‪I'll‬‬

‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪You will‬‬ ‫‪You'll‬‬ ‫‪They will‬‬ ‫‪They ,ll‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺿﻤﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ will not‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ won't‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻦ ‪want‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺖ ‪went‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪go‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪won't‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ‪will not‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ will‬ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪You will help him‬‬ ‫?‪will you help him‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ not‬ﺭﺍﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‪ will‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪She will stay here‬‬ ‫‪she will not(won't) stay here.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺩﺍ‪1-tomorrow‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪2-next‬‬

‫)‪We ….to shires next week .(to travel‬‬ ‫‪will travel‬‬

‫)‪Where ……you …..him tomorrow?(to visit‬‬ ‫‪will-visit‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪+ will+be+ ing‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫‪by‬‬
‫‪Before‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪in+‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻥ ‪ all‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪ is‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ً ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪+ will + have +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻛﺜﺮﺍً ﻗﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ by‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﻳـﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻧﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ -‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪) by before‬ﺗﺎﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ( ‪) when‬ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ( ‪) till‬ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ( ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺟﺰﻭﻋﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + will+have+been+ ing‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ by‬ﺑﺎﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‪by+‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪for +‬‬ ‫) ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ( for+‬ﺩﺭﺁﺧﺮﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ by‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺩﺭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ) ﻃﻮﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪( for +‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻨﺮﻭﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎ ﺭﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫‪Will‬‬ ‫‪would‬‬ ‫‪shall‬‬ ‫‪should‬‬ ‫‪Must‬‬ ‫‪had to‬‬
‫‪Can‬‬ ‫‪could‬‬ ‫‪May‬‬ ‫‪might‬‬

‫‪١٠‬‬
 ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪You can see‬‬ ‫?‪can you see‬‬
‫‪They should come‬‬ ‫‪they shouldn't come.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ) ﭼﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﭼﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪He will go‬‬ ‫‪she may go‬‬ ‫‪He would go‬‬

‫‪١١‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ‬

1-He …..English for two hours.

1-studies 2-is study * 3-has studied 4-is studding
2-My sister …..lunch before we arrived.
1.cooks * 2.had cooked 3.will cook 4.is cooking
3-They ……the house when I arrived.
*1.were leaving 2.leave 3.are leaving 4.will leave
4-…….you….the letters two days ago?
1.Did-post 2.Does-post * 3.Did-posted 4.Do-posted
5-she could have solved it if I………her.
1.help * 2.had helped 3.have helped 4.willhelp
6- if my brother studied hard, he …..his exams.
1.could pass 2.will pass 3.had passed 4.passes
7-if he ….here today, you could visit him here.
1.was 2.is 3.were 4.has been
8-we can go on a picnic unless it…… .
1.rains 2.rained 3.had rained 4.would rain
9-You ……wash the dishes if they ordered you.
1.will 2.would have 3.would 4.had
10-If you….your money, you would have a house.
1.save 2.had saved 3.will save 4.saved
11-I know they ……stayed here if we had invited them.
1.will 2.would 3.would have 4.would be
12-she would have certainly passed her exam if she …hard.
1.had studied 2.studied 3.studies 4.would study
13-If my mother….with us, we would have enjoyed our travel much more.
1.travelled 2.traveles * 3.had traveled 4.would travel
14-If he put the stamp on the envelope, I….it.
1.will post 2.post 3.had posted 4.would post
15- You can have a big saving on fuel if you…..public transportation.
*1.use 2.used 3.had used 4.will use
16-I didn't see him because he was sick.
1.If he weren't sick, would see him.
2.If he hadn't been sick, I would see him.
3.If he weren't sick, I would have seen him.

١٢
*4.If he hadn't been sick, I would have seen him.
17-she might have invited you if you …there.
1.are *2.had been 3.have been 4.were
18-If he….hard, he would fail his exam.
1.studied *2.didn,tstudy 3.studies 4.doesn,t study
19-They will go to the park….it rains.
1.so *2.unless 3.because 4.as if
20-she won't be able to do the job if he ….here…
1.left 2.had left * 3.leaves 4.was left

١٣
 ‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪1- She……………lunch yesterday.(to cook‬‬ ‫‪cooked‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﺍﺯﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ cook‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪2-She enjoyed ……lunch yesterday.(to cook‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌـﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺩﻭﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪).‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ (‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪to‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪ ing -1‬ﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ‪ -‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ – ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪to‬‬

‫‪١٤‬‬
 .‫ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬ing ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬: ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

Avoid ‫ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ keep ‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬

Admit ‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ Look forward to ‫ﭼﺸﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
Appreciate ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ Mind ‫ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
Consider ‫ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ Miss ‫ﺍﺯﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
Dislike ‫ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ‬ Practice ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
risk ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﺮﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ‬ Enjoy ‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ‬
Suggest ‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ Find ‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

Smell ‫ﺑﻮﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ Finish ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

Spend ‫ﮔﺬﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ‬ Imagine ‫ﺗﺼﻮﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
Stop ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

.‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬ing ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬

Would you mind ….the door?(to open) opening

They are considering……….a house.(to buy) buying

We had finished……….our lunch.(to have) having

‫ﺣـﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻬـﻢ ﺩﺭﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴـﺴﻲ‬.‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ‬ing ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻴﺰﻓﻌﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬:‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
:‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‬
In-of-on-at-for-by-with-without- before-after - when –while-

He is interested in…….around the world.(to travel) traveling

Thank you for …….us again.(to call) calling
We have decided to watch T.V instead of ……tennis.(to play) playing

١٥
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ while, when, after, before‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﻋﻼﺋـﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬـﺎ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺣﻜﻢ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫)‪1- After she ….the room, I went in .(to clean‬‬ ‫‪had cleaned‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫)‪2- After …..the room ,I went in.(to clean‬‬ ‫‪cleaning‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫)‪3- she had left here before …….the book.(to read‬‬ ‫‪reading‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﻲ‬
‫‪Listen‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪left‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫‪Feel‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪Make‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪See‬‬ ‫ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪Would rather‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫‪Hear‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪Had better‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪watch‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪Notice‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﻢ ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪I saw him ……….to school.(to walk‬‬ ‫‪walk‬‬

‫‪Walking‬‬

‫‪١٦‬‬
 ‫)‪We heard some one …..at the door.(to knock‬‬ ‫‪knock‬‬
‫‪Knocking‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻛـﺎﺭﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺍﮔﺮﺑﻄﻮﺭﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﻧـﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﺛﺮﺵ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪I saw him wash his car.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺭﺍﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺴﺖ‬
‫‪I saw him washing his car.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺭﺍﺩﻳﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪I heard him call Reza.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪I heard him calling Reza.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻡ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻭﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺿﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯﻣﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻣﻬﻢ‪:‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ had better, would rather ,make, left‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪I didn't let him…….in the yard.(to play‬‬ ‫‪play‬‬
‫)‪His father always makes him….home.(to stay‬‬ ‫‪stay‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻴﺰﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻏﻴﺮﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ make‬ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪ to‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

‫)‪She was made……home.(to leave‬‬ ‫‪to leave‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ make‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﺠﻬـﻮﻝ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺭﺍﻫـﻲ ﺑـﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺍﮔـﺮﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤـﻪ‬
‫‪ make‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ‪.‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎً ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳـﺮ ﻳﻜـﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ make‬ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ ‪to‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬
‫) ‪1-He made us…..(to go‬‬ ‫‪go‬‬
‫) ‪2-He was made …..(to go‬‬ ‫‪to go‬‬

‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪1‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‪ make‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 2‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‪ make‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘـﺎً ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭﺗﻌـﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﻛـﻼً‬
‫ﺩﺭﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺟﺰء ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ )ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪ ing‬ﺩﺍﺭ ( ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳـﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ) ﺍﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ( ﻧﺒﺎﺷـﺪ ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺟـﺰء ﺩﺳـﺘﻪ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫)‪-I was allowed…..in the room.(to smoke‬‬ ‫‪to smoke‬‬

‫)‪-We want….him for a walk .(to take‬‬ ‫‪to take‬‬
‫)‪– She has told me …….here soon.(to leave‬‬ ‫‪to leave‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ To‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬

‫‪1) That bag it too heavy for you. Let me………. You.‬‬
‫‪*A)help‬‬ ‫‪B) to help‬‬ ‫‪C) helping‬‬ ‫‪D)that help‬‬
‫‪2) I have to go now I promised……..late.‬‬
‫‪A)not being‬‬ ‫‪*B) not to be‬‬ ‫‪C) to not be‬‬ ‫‪D)don’t be‬‬
‫‪3) the needs……..harder if he wants to make program‬‬
‫‪*A)to work‬‬ ‫‪B)work‬‬ ‫‪C)working‬‬ ‫‪D)that work‬‬
‫‪4)I don’t enjoy………very much.‬‬
‫‪A)that drive‬‬ ‫‪B)to drive‬‬ ‫‪C)drive‬‬ ‫‪* D)driving‬‬
‫‪5)the pretended……..me when he passed me on the street.‬‬
‫‪*A)not to see‬‬ ‫‪B)not seeing‬‬ ‫‪C) to not see‬‬ ‫‪D)don’t see‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻣﻬﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ help‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻱ ﭘـﻲ ﺗـﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺯﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪I helped him …….(to cook‬‬ ‫‪cook‬‬
‫‪to cook‬‬

‫‪١٨‬‬
 ‫‪I wish‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ I wish‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ »ﺍﻳﻜﺎﺵ« ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‪ I wish‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ I wish‬ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪be fore, ago, last, yesterday‬ﻳﺎ‪ earlier‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ I wish‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪I wish I ….him yesterday .( to help‬‬ ‫‪had helped‬‬
‫) ‪He was late. I wish I…him.(to visit‬‬ ‫‪had visited‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ I wish‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ‪I wish‬‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪I wish you ….the letter.(to write‬‬ ‫‪wrote‬‬

‫)‪I wish you ….the game, but you didn't (to win‬‬ ‫‪had won‬‬
‫) ‪They wish I….my key in the park.(not to lose‬‬ ‫‪didn't lose‬‬
‫)‪I wish my father. very hard when he was young.(to work‬‬ ‫‪had worked‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﺎً ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ‪ I wish‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ was‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪ were‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪).‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ (‬
‫) ‪I wish I ……you .(to be‬‬ ‫‪were‬‬
‫)‪I wish …..him now(to see‬‬ ‫‪to see‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ I wish‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﺯﻗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ I wish‬ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﻠـﻲ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺯﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨـﺪ ﻭﭼـﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪ wish‬ﻣﺘﻌﻠـﻖ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰءﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻓﻌـﻞ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪to‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ wish‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ‪ like‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩‬‬
 ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‪ I wish‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ I wish‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫}‪I wish you…….your hands.{to wash‬‬ ‫‪washed‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‪ I wish‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪I wish you…....your hands before.(to wash‬‬ ‫‪had washed‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ was‬ﺍﺯ‪ were‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‬
‫}‪I wish he……my friend.{to be‬‬ ‫‪were‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﺧﺮﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ I wish‬ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫}‪I wish…….him as soon as possible.{to see‬‬ ‫‪to see‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ‪ I wish‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﺁﻳﻨـﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ }ﻓﻌﻞ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪{would+‬‬
‫}‪I wish……your house next week. {to paint‬‬ ‫‪would paint‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﻣــﻮﺭﺩﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺨــﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻇﻬﺎﺭﺷــﻜﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻤــﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﻳــﻦ ﺣﺎﻟــﺖ ﻧﻴﺰﻓﻌــﻞ ﺟﻤﻠــﻪ ﺑــﺼﻮﺭﺕ }ﻓﻌــﻞ ﺳــﺎﺩﻩ‪+‬‬
‫‪{would‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ‪ I wish‬ﺑـﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺣـﺎﻝ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎﺍﺳـﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪It has been raining for three days. I wish it would stop‬‬
‫‪He is driving very fast. I wish he would reduce his speed.‬‬

‫)‪I wish it would rain tomorrow.(but now it is sunny‬‬

‫)‪I wish I had blue eyes.(but I don't‬‬

‫)‪I wish I hadn’t bought these shoes yesterday.(but I bought them‬‬

‫‪I wish you…….. me about it before‬‬

‫‪*A) had told‬‬ ‫‪B) told‬‬ ‫‪C) hare told‬‬ ‫‪D) tell‬‬

‫‪I wish the teacher…….going to give another test today.‬‬

‫‪A) won't‬‬ ‫‪* B) weren’t‬‬ ‫‪C) isn’t‬‬ ‫‪D) aren’t‬‬

‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪I wish I…….a car . It would make life so much easier.‬‬
‫‪A) hare‬‬ ‫‪*B)had‬‬ ‫‪C)would hare‬‬ ‫‪D)have had‬‬

‫‪I don’t know many people. I wish I ……….move people.‬‬

‫‪A) know‬‬ ‫‪*B) knew‬‬ ‫‪C) would know‬‬ ‫‪D)had known‬‬

‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ ‪Pronouns‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ‪:‬‬

‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪we‬‬
‫‪you‬‬ ‫‪you‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ‬
‫‪He/she/it‬‬ ‫‪they‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪they live in kerman‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﻓﻌﻞ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪You speak English much better than she does.‬‬
‫‪it is I‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻓﻌﻞ ‪to be‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ I‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ‪ him,me‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪me‬‬ ‫‪us‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ‬

‫‪You‬‬ ‫‪you‬‬
‫‪Him/her/it‬‬ ‫‪them‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ see,show,give,help‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺿﻤﻴﺮﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ‪+‬ﻓﻌﻞ‪+‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪stay away from him‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪It is easier for them than us.‬‬

‫‪٢١‬‬
 ‫‪ -3‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻴﺮﻭﻧﺪ ﻭﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪My‬‬ ‫‪our‬‬
‫‪Your‬‬ ‫‪your‬‬
‫‪His/her/its‬‬ ‫‪their‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪our company‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ‬
‫‪his hand‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻥ‬
‫‪Gerund‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫?‪Do you mind my making a suggestion‬‬

‫‪mine‬‬ ‫‪ours‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ‬

‫‪Yours‬‬ ‫‪yours‬‬
‫‪His/hers/its‬‬ ‫‪theirs‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪That, s my pen‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﻓﻌﻞ ‪to be‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻱ ‪of‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ »ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ« ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪it is a habit of theirs. .‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪myself‬‬ ‫‪ourselves‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪Your self‬‬ ‫‪your selves‬‬
‫‪Himself/herself/itself‬‬ ‫‪them selves‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫‪I see myself‬‬
‫‪I will buy a book for myself.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٢‬‬
 ‫ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬-3
I my self helped him
‫ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬-4
She cleaned the room herself

‫ ﺍﺯﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬with ‫ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬-5

:‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ‬
.‫ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬-1
1- she went home……………
1.himself * 2.herself 3.themselves 4.my self
.‫ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬-2
2-My brother talks about……………..
1.my self * 2.him self

3-His sisters look at ……..in the mirror.

1.himself 2.herself 3.ourselves * 4.themselves
.‫ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺎﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬s ‫ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬-3
3-Ali, s wife washed it…………………….
1.himself * 2.herself
.‫ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬yourselves‫ﻳﺎ‬yourself ‫ ﺍﮔﺮﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬-4
1-Look at ……..in the mirror.
1.my self * 2.yourself 3.himself 4.them selves

2-Look after……..during your journey. My mother told us.

*1.yourselves 2.yourself 3.them selves 4.herself
with ‫ﻋـﻼﻭﻩ ﺑــﺮﺁﻥ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄــﻪ ﭼـﻴﻦ ﺣــﺮﻑ ﺍﺿــﺎﻓﻪ‬.‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠــﻪ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺿﻤﻴﺮﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳــﻲ ﻧﻤـﻲ ﮔﻴــﺮﺩ‬take ‫ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ‬-5
.‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺍﺯﺿﻤﻴﺮﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‬،‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
My mother took the baby with………….
1.himself 2.herself *3.her 4.ourselves

٢٣
 ‫ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬-6
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ »ﻛﻪ «ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‬
:‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‬

who ‫ﻛﻪ‬ whose ‫ ﺵ‬-‫ﻛﻪ‬

whom ‫ﻛﻪ‬ which ‫ﻛﻪ‬

:‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬+who+‫ﻓﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬+whom+‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬+whose+‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
(‫ ﺷﻴﺌﻲ)ﻏﻴﺮﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬+ which+.....

1-Iknow the man……went to the theater.

1.who 2.whom 3.whose 4.which
2-I know the man ……you told me about.
1.who 2.whom 3.whose 4.which
3.I know the man ……car is red.
1.who 2.whom 3.whose 4.which
4-Ilike the car …..you bought yesterday .
1.who 2.whom 3.whose 4.which

.‫ﺍﮔﺮﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬

The man to…I spoke is a pilot.

1.who 2.whom 3.whose 4.which

٢٤
Balloons rise into the air because they

A B
Contain a gas who is less dense,or lighter,than air.
C D
‫ ﻏﻠﻂ‬c ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬that ‫ﻳﺎ‬which ‫ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬gas ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬
. ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬

The narwhal is the only animal in the world that has a tusk on
A B
only one side of it body.
C D

D ‫ ( ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬body) ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‬.‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬B ‫ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬:‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
IT ‫ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻪ‬ITS ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﺶ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
The best way for children to learn science
A B
IS for then to perform experiments himself.
C D
.‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬them selfs ‫ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬himself‫ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻫﺴﺘﺶ ﻭ‬children ‫ ﭼﻮﻥ‬:‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
Herman Melville gathered material for him novels,including
A B
moby Dick,during his years at sea.
C D
.‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‬his ‫ (ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲﻳﺎ‬novels) ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ‬HIM ‫ ﭼﻮﻥ‬:‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ‬

‫ ﺑــﻪ ﺷــﺮﻁ ﺁﻧﻜــﻪ‬.‫ ﭘــﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬــﺎ ﺭﺍﺣــﺬﻑ ﻛــﺮﺩ‬to be ‫ﺩﺭﺯﺑــﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴــﺴﻲ ﻣــﻲ ﺗــﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﻣﻮﺻــﻮﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻣــﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬
.‫ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬to be ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﻭﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬

I know the boy who is washing the car.

I know the boy washing the car.

I didn, t know the boy who was killed in the accident.

I didn, t know the boy killed in the accident.

٢٥
‫( ﻓﻌـﻞ‬1 ‫ﺍﮔﺮﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ)ﻣﺜـﺎﻝ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬.‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺣﺬﻑ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ ﻧﻮﺷــﺘﻪ‬p.p ‫( ﻓﻌــﻞ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧــﺪﻩ ﺑــﻪ ﺻــﻮﺭﺕ‬2‫ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﮔــﺮ ﺟﻤﻠــﻪ ﻣﺠﻬــﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷــﺪ )ﻣﺜــﺎﻝ ﺷــﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬ing ‫ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧــﺪﻩ ﺑــﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

1-I know the boy washing (who is washing )the car.

2-The man running (who is running)fast is my father.
3-The children playing (who are playing) tennis seem really tired.
‫ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬:‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
1-Most plastics made (which are made)from oil are difficult to recycle.
2-The photographs taken (that are taken) of the earth are wonderful
3-The new school built (that is built) here is really large.

‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩﻭﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ‬to be ‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﻣﻮﺻـﻮﻟﻲ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻣـﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ‬ing ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻴﺰﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎﻳﻲ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﮔﺮﺩﻳـﺪﻩ ﻭﭼـﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣﻌﻠـﻮﻡ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
.‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬

1-All over the world there are people who pollute the air.

All over the world there are people polluting the air.

2-In some countries people who produce trash are punished.

-In some countries people producing trash are punished.

3-The scientists who research the cause of climate changes are making
progress.

The scientists researching the cause of climate changes are making

progress.

٢٦
 :‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
1-I didn't, t know the boy………the letter.
1.written * 2.writing

2-All the guests……….to the party were from shiraz.

*1.invited 2.inviting

3-I don't like the man……….a speech.

*1.giving 2.given

4-Endorphin…………..into the vessels make us happy.

*1.released 2.releasing

5-Ididn,t get the letter……yesterday.

*1.written 2.writing

6-Do you like any of the cars…………..here?

*1.sold 2.selling

7-The cars……………….in Japan are really comfortable.

*1.made 2.making

8-There are many books………into other languages everyday.

*1.translated 2.translating

9-Cars are among the factors……….air.

*1.polluting 2.polluted

10-About one hundred years ago a man…….Edison was born in America.

1.calling * 2.called

٢٧
 ‫ ﺿﻤﺎﺋﺮ‬، I wish ،‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‬

1-my brother enjoys……the piano very well.

*1-playing 2-play 3- to play 4-played

2-would you mind……the window?

1-open 2-to open 3-opened * 4-opening

3-when I was a child my mother never let me……my bicycle alone

1-riding 2-rode 3-to rode * 4-ride

4-at the garden we could see many children……football.

1-to play 2-played 3-playing *4-will play

5-the officer has forced the soldiers……up early.

1-to wake 2-wake 3-waking 4-waked

6-I wish you……the letters last night.

1-posted * 2-had posted 3-post 4-have posted

7-he was late. I wish he……here on time.

1-arrive 2-would arrive 3-arriveed *4-had arrive

8-His parents mad him…… in a factory 10 hours day.

*1-work 2-to work 3-working 4-worked

9-they will pay you much money if you…….the rooms

1-painted *2-paint 3-would paint 4-had painted

10- This is the boy ……shirt is always dirty.

1.who 2.whom * 3.whose 4.which

11-In the spring you can hear birds …..beautifully.

1.sing 2.sang 3.sung * 4.singing

12-We listened to the old man …..his story.

1.told 2.to tell * 3.telling 4.has told

٢٨
13-He offered me …..my car near my office.
1.park 2.parking 3.parked * 4.to park

14-When I went home, I found my brother….T.V.

1. Watch *2.watching 3.to watch 4.watched

15-Stop….too much. You are getting too fat.

1. eat 2.to eat 3.ate * 4.eating

16-I can see many children……in the park.

1.play 2.to play 3.played *4.playing

17-My father asked me ……my driving license.

1.renew 2.renewing 3.renewed * 4.to renew

18-Do you know the man ….we talked about?

1.who *2.whom 3.whose 4.which

19-He is driving to school very fast. I wish he ….down.

*1.would slow 2.had slowed 3.slows 4.willslow

20-Sara suggested……….the letter as soon as possible.

1.post * 2.posting 3.to post 4.posted

٢٩
 ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺭﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪a tall tree‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ‪+‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪+‬ﺳﻦ‪+‬ﺭﻧﮓ‪+‬ﻣﻠﻴﺖ‪+‬ﺟﻨﺲ‪+‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺪﺍﻣﻴﻚ ﺍﺯﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪He showed me a……………….‬‬
‫‪1.beautiful cotton red shirt‬‬ ‫‪2.red cotton beautiful shirt‬‬
‫‪3.cotton beautiful red shirt‬‬ ‫‪* 4.beautiful red cotton shirt‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪-1‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪-2‬ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪-3‬ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫‪-4‬ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺯﺷﺖ‪-‬ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪-‬ﺑﺰﺭﻙ‪-‬ﻛﻮﭼﻚ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪،‬ﻣﺜﻼً‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻲ ﺍﺯﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺏ }ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ{ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ}‪ {er‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻱ‪ more‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻼً‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬

‫‪ + Er‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ‪to be +‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ ... 3‬ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ‪more +‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ‪+ ( than+‬‬
‫‪He is taller.‬‬

‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪He is taller than she.‬‬
‫‪She is more beautiful than he.‬‬

‫‪ + er+than‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼً‬ ‫‪tall‬‬ ‫‪taller than‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ expensive‬ﻣﺜﻼً ‪+ than‬ﺻﻔﺖ‪ more+‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ‬ ‫‪More expensive than‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻛﻠﻤﻪ}‪{than‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ}ﺍﺯ{ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫}‪My car is……than your car.{comfortable‬‬ ‫‪more comfortable‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪:‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪He is very old.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺻـﻔﺖ ﺳـﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﻱ‪ very‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭﺻـﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‪very‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪He is much older than you.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮﺻﻔﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻱ‪ very‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﺑﺎﺷﺪﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪much‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ »‪«y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬
‫‪Easy‬‬ ‫‪easier‬‬ ‫‪lazy‬‬ ‫‪lazier‬‬
‫‪Busy‬‬ ‫‪busier‬‬ ‫‪happy‬‬ ‫‪happier‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﭼﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼً ﺍﻭﭼﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﺮﻛﻼﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ»‪ «est‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ‪ most‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﻫﺮﺩﻭﻣﻮﺭﺩﺑﺎﻳﺪﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ the‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻱ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻮﻋﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣١‬‬
 in + ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬+ Est
To Be +the + ‫ ﺍﺳﻢ‬+ Of all
most + ‫ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬... 3 ‫ ﻭ‬2 ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬
That i

He is the tallest.
He is the tallest student in the class.

‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ‬1-the‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+ est ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ young The youngest

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ‬2-themost+‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ beautiful The most beautiful

:‫ﻃﺮﺯﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬
:‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
1-the 3-of all
2-in 4-ever

1-Heis the…man I know.{fat} fattest

2-You are...girl in the glass.{beautiful} the most beautiful

3-This is…book. I have ever seen.{interesting} the most interesting

.‫ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‬the ‫ﺍﺯﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬

:‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬

He is….student in the class.
1.better 2.worse 3.best 4.the worst

٣٢
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ in‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻏﻠـﻂ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺯﻳـﺮﺍ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯﺻـﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻤﺎَ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪ the‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ 4‬ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩ ﻭﺷﺨﺺ ﻳﺎﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ‪ as :‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ‪Be+as‬‬
‫‪He is as fat as Ali‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as…………..as‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﺮﺍﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪you are as clever as my brother‬‬
‫‪I am as fat as he is‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ as‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ so‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮﺍﺯﺧﻮﺩﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪You aren't so clever as my brother.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ (narrow)ow,(clever)er (simple)le(happy)y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ)‪ (est,er‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪Narrow‬‬ ‫‪narrower‬‬ ‫‪the narrowest‬‬
‫‪er -2‬ﻳﺎ‪ more‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﻓﺰﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ less‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻳﺎﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫‪Less good‬‬ ‫‪less beautiful‬‬
‫‪est -3‬ﻳﺎ‪ most‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﻓﺰﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻧـﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺭﺟـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﻋـﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ the least‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪1‬ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫‪The least good‬‬
‫‪The least beautiful‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ very‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪very taller‬‬
‫‪Much Taller‬‬

‫‪٣٣‬‬
 ‫ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬-5
the+ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬..... the+ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬
The sooner, the better
The more you work, the more you earn.
The more he study,the less he learn.
‫( ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ‬6
:‫ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬est‫ ﻭ‬er ‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬/‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬

good (‫)ﺻﻔﺖ‬ better The best
well (‫)ﻗﻴﺪ‬ better The best
bad ( ‫)ﺻﻔﺖ‬ worse The worst
badly (‫)ﻗﻴﺪ‬ worse The worst
little less The least
many more The most
much more The most

farther The farthest

far
farther The farthest
older The eldest
old
older The eldest
Late(‫)ﻗﻴﺪ‬ Later The last
few fewer The fewest

( ‫ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤـﻊ‬more ‫ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
‫ ﺏ( ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳـﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬Less ‫ ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬: ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺩﻭﻟﻐﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
.‫ ﺍﺳﺖ‬fewer ‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬
More books fewer books
More water Less water

٣٤
 ‫ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﺣﺎﻟﺖ(‬

‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﺻﻔﺖ ‪ ly‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻴﺪﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪slowly-quickly:‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻴﺪﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪at school-in the park:‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﻗﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪now-this morning:‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﺯﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪+‬ﻗﻴﺪﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪+‬ﻗﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ »ﺣﻤﺰ« ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪He studies carefully at school every day‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ‪ :‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪Always, usually, often, some times, never, seldom,……..‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪He never comes late.‬‬
‫‪He is never late.‬‬
‫‪Will never forget you.‬‬

‫ﻛﺪﺍﻣﻴﻚ ﺍﺯﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ؟‬

‫‪1.He has seen always me here every day.‬‬
‫‪*2.He has always seen me here every day‬‬
‫‪3.He always has seen me here every day.‬‬
‫‪4.He has always seen me every day here.‬‬

‫‪٣٥‬‬
 ‫‪ + ly‬ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬

‫‪Beautiful‬‬ ‫‪beautifully‬‬ ‫‪quick‬‬ ‫‪quickly‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ lovely‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻨﻲ ﻭ‪ friendly‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻧﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪to be‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺯﺻـﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ‪ to be‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪He is a ….boy‬‬
‫‪1.quick‬‬ ‫‪2.quickly‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﻭﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ؟‬
‫ﺟﻮﺍﺏ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﺑﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍﻣﺸﺘﻖ ‪ to be‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫……‪He is running‬‬
‫‪1.slow‬‬ ‫‪2.slowly‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ good‬ﺧﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪well‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ‬
‫‪ fast‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪fast‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫‪ hard‬ﺻﻔﺖ‬ ‫‪hard‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺨﺘﻲ –ﺑﺎﺗﻼﺵ‬

‫‪hardly‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺯﺣﻤﺖ‪-‬ﺑﺎﺑﺪﺑﺨﺘﻲ‬

‫‪٣٦‬‬
 .‫ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬hardly :‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
:‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
1-He is a….boy
1.good 2.well

2-He speaks English….

1.good 2.well

3-I work…..
1.hard 2.hardly

4-I….work
1.hard 2.hardly

5.Irun…
1.fast 2.fastly
(‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬fastly ‫)ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬

٣٧
 ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪1.He works…….‬‬
‫‪1.slow‬‬ ‫‪2.slowly‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻴﺪﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪2.He works…than I do.‬‬
‫‪1.slower‬‬ ‫‪2.slowly‬‬ ‫‪3.more slowly‬‬ ‫‪4.more slow‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪ than‬ﻭﺟـﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻗﻴﺪﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻫﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪﺑﺮﺗﺮﻫﻢ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻫﺮﻗﻴـﺪﻱ ﺩﺭﺯﺑـﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴـﺴﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ‪ ly‬ﺧـﺘﻢ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﻗﻴﺪﺑﺮﺗﺮ‪ more‬ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻭ ‪ ly‬ﺩﺭﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﻫﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ than‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪﺑﺮﺗﺮﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3-I drive …..than you do.‬‬
‫‪1.careful‬‬ ‫‪2.more careful‬‬ ‫‪3.carefully‬‬ ‫‪4.more carefully‬‬

‫‪4-I am …than you are.‬‬

‫‪1-Carefull‬‬ ‫‪2.more careful‬‬ ‫‪3.carefuly‬‬ ‫‪4.morecarefully‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪ 4‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ‪ to be‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪5.He runs…..than I do.‬‬
‫‪1.faster‬‬ ‫‪2.more fast‬‬ ‫‪3.fastly‬‬ ‫‪4.more fastly‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪c‬ﻭ‪ d‬ﻏﻠﻂ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﺯﻳﺮﺍ ‪ fast‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ly‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ b‬ﻧﻴـﺰﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺯﻳـﺮﺍ‪ fast‬ﻳـﻚ ﺑﺨـﺸﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ more‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ faster‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﻴﺪﺑﺮﺗﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺯﻳـﺮﺍ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٨‬‬
 ‫ﻗﻴﺪﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫‪1- She is …..of all.‬‬

‫‪1-More beautiful‬‬ ‫‪2.the most beautiful‬‬
‫‪3.more beautifully‬‬ ‫‪4.the most beautifully.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ )‪( of all‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1-She plays…….….of all‬‬

‫‪1.more beautiful‬‬ ‫‪2.the most beautiful‬‬
‫‪3.more beautifully‬‬ ‫‪4.the most beautifully.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 2‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻭ ﭼـﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺑﺮﺗـﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ d‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ)ﻗﻴﺪﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ(‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬

‫‪1-He is as…..as I am.‬‬

‫‪1.slow‬‬ ‫‪2.slowly‬‬

‫‪2-he works as….as I do‬‬

‫‪1.slow‬‬ ‫‪2-slowly‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪1‬ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﺯﻳﺮﺍﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‪ to be‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪2‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ‪ as…….as‬ﺍﺯﻗﻴﺪﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩﺍﻳﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺪﺗـﺴﺎﻭﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫)‪ (to be‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪as‬‬ ‫‪as‬‬
‫)ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ(ﻗﻴﺪﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫‪٣٩‬‬
 ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ‪ to be‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1-My car is as …as your car.‬‬
‫‪1.good‬‬ ‫‪2.well‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2-Iwork as …..as you.‬‬
‫‪1.good‬‬ ‫‪2.well‬‬

‫?‪3-How are you‬‬

‫‪I am as….as you are‬‬
‫‪1.good‬‬ ‫‪2.well‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ‪ to be‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﺎَ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﻭ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻭﻱ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑـﻪ ﺟـﺎﻱ ‪ good‬ﺍﺯ ‪ well‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻَ ﺑﺎﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ ‪How are you‬‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٠‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭﻗﻴﺪ‬

1-Ali drives…….than Reza does.

1.careful 2.more careful 3.carefully * 4.more carefully

2-Cats are usually …….than dogs.

*1.prettier 2.prettiest 3.as pretty 4.pretty

3-Parsa drives as….as his father does.

1.careful * 2.carefully 3.more carefully 4.most carefully

4-When I entered the kitchen, I could smell some thing……

1.burn 2.to burn 3.will burn * 4.burning

5-I know it is impossible !But I wish I…. in your shoes.

1.had been 2.was 3.willbe * 4.were

6-This is the girl…..I told you about before.

1.who * 2.whom 3.whose 4.which

7-In fact he is ……student in his class.

1.better 2.worse 3.best *4.the worst

8-….like to collect the stamps….are old.

1.who 2. whom 3.whose * 4.which

9-My brother says that he …..my friends yet.

*1.hasn, t seen 2.has seen 3.saw 4.sees

10-I wish …..your letter as soon possible.

1.received 2.had received * 3.to receive 4.receiving

11-How are you today? I am as……as yesterday.

1.good 2.better * 3.well 4.best

٤١
12-she could have solved the problem if she ….on it.
*1.had worked 2.worked 3.would work 4.works

13-They asked my parents …..to school each week.

*1.to come 2.come 3.came 4.coming

14-I wish you ….buy that expensive house.

1.can *2.could 3.will 4.shall

15-He set a fire .I wish he ……it.

*1.hadn,t done 2.didn,t do 3.hasn,t done 4.doesn,t do

16-Tom advised me ….a doctor as soon as possible.

1.see *2.to see 3.seeing 4.saw

17-If you had written your address, I…..you a letter.

1.would send 2.will send * 3.would have sent 4.would sent

18-I think this is….book. I have ever read.

1.more interesting 2.less interesting
3.most interesting * 4.the least interesting

19-They always insisted on …in that country.

*1.living 2.live 3.to live 4.lived

20-You should check the lights before ….here.

1.leave 2.to leave 3.fad left * 4.leaving

21-I can't imagine…..in this small apartment.

1.live * 2.living 3.to live 4.lived

22-He would like me …..him in his work.

*1.to help 2.help 3.helping 4.helped

23-My mother never lets me …..alone.

1.travelling 2.to travel * 3.travel 4.travelled

٤٢
24-He decided to avoid……his friends.
1.visit * 2.visiting 3.to visit 4.visited

25-Finally we decided to help her……the dishes.

*1.wash 2.washing 3.washed 4.has washed

٤٣
 ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺜﻼً‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺭﺳﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ »ﻣﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ« ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪+‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ‪1-and so+‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫‪+ Too‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ‪+‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪2-and‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪+‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ‪3-and neither+‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪+ Either‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ‪+‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪4-and‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ either‬ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪and‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪or‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪and-or-but-yet-so‬‬
‫‪but‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬
‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬
‫‪yet‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫‪-‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ‪ so‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫‪٤٤‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
Tom is sad , …….. but paul is happy.

‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬Ali is brilliant , and……saeed has a pleasant personality.
Ali was sick , ……… yet he went to school

‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨـﮓ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ‬ , ‫ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
.‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ,

‫ﺷﺎﺩﺯﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺩﻥ‬

Live ree , or
………… die

It was a very wet day , so we stayed at home.

………

A power failure accured , ….. the Lamps went out .

A) them *B) so c) Later D) next

Case studies are target of much skepticism in the scientific

Communit , ……… used extensively by people.
A)they are B)are
c)yet they *D)yet they are

They speak English, and so does he.

and he does too.

We saw them, and so did she.

and she did too.

He is writing a letter ,and so am I.

and I am too.

We have helped you, and so has Ali.

and Ali has too.

٤٥
‫‪They can't come here, and neither can he.‬‬
‫‪and he can't either‬‬

‫‪You don't look tired, and neither do I.‬‬

‫‪andiron either‬‬

‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﺭﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪When-since-as- whether…..or‬‬

‫‪ :when -1‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ when‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛـﺎﺭﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻧﻴﺰﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﻭﻭﺍﻗﻌﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪1-when you exercise, your body gets tired little by little.‬‬
‫‪ :since -2‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ since‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﭼﻮﻧﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭﻣﺘـﺮﺍﺩﻑ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪ because‬ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Since‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺭﻭﺩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻱ ﭼﻮﻧﻜـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻗﻴﺪﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﻘﻴﻘﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪ since‬ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﻗﻠﻤﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ Since .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‬
‫‪ ..‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ because‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : As -3‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪:‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ -‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﻭﻛﺎﺭﺩﺭﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ ﻭﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺩﺭﻧﻘﺶ ‪ when‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪…I entered the house ,I saw her.‬‬
‫ﺏ‪ :‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ – ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺩﺭﻧﻘﺶ ‪ since‬ﻳﺎ ‪ because‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪….to take an umbrella as it was raining.‬‬

‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺝ‪:‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ» ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ« ﻳﺎ»ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ« ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺷـﺒﺎﻫﺖ ﺯﻳـﺎﺩﻱ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪ when‬ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ» ﻧﺴﺒﺖ« ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳـﻲ ﻣﻴﻜﻨـﺪ ‪.‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮ» ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ«ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﭘﻴﺮﺗﺮﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺗﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪As people get older, they get weaker.‬‬

‫ﺩ‪ -‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﺎﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪He is as old as I am.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻴﺰﺑﻜﺎﺭﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪As a teacher,I am interested in my students.‬‬

‫‪ :whether-or-4‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭﻣﻜﻤﻞ ﻫـﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺑـﻪ ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻱ ﺧـﻮﺍﻩ –ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﭼﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻫـﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻫـﻴﭻ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﺯﻣﻮﺿـﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻄـﺮﺡ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻣﻬـﻢ ﻧﻴـﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪They will leave here whether you stay or you leave.‬‬
‫‪She will buy the book whether they agree or not.‬‬

‫‪)Contrast‬ﺗﻀﺎﺩ(‬

‫ﺩﺭﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﻳﺎﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞ )‪ (Contrast‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺯﻳﺮ ﺑـﻪ ﭼﻨـﺪﻳﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫‪) While-whereas‬ﺗﻀﺎﺩﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ(‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﺗﻀﺎﺩﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻣـﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺭﺍﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺣﺲ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺤﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Some people are tall, while others are short‬‬

‫‪٤٧‬‬
 ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯﻣﺮﺩﻡ ﻗﺪﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪While Ali works hard, his brother is lazy‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻭﺟﻮﺩﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺩﺭﺵ ﺗﻨﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ‪while‬ﻳﺎ ‪ whereas‬ﺍﺯﻛﺎﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪While I work hard, my brother is lazy.‬‬
‫‪I work hard ,while my brother is lazy .‬‬

‫‪Although –Though-Even though‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻭﺟﻮﺩﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ –ﻋﻠﻴﺮﻏﻢ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻭﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﺍﻣـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ unexpected results‬ﻳﺎﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼً‪:‬‬
‫‪1-Although he fell the sixth floor, he is a live.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﺍﺯﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺷﺸﻢ ﭘﺮﺕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪2- This computer is cheap, though it is one of the best machines on the market.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺩﺭﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﻗـﺖ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺟـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺣﺲ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ﻣﺎﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﻴﺨﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺮﺍﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻘـﻪ ﺷـﺸﻢ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺗﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﻣﻲ ﻣﻴﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٨‬‬
 :‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
1-I spoke English, and…………..
1.so does he 2.he did too 3.neither does he 4.he didn't either

2-we are listening to music, and….

1.so do they 2.neither are they 3.so they are 4.so are they

3-You have seen that boy ,and …

1.so she has 2.she does too 3.she doesn't either 4.she has too

4-They weren't interested in watching T.V, and….

1.so was I 2.neither was I 3.neither did I 4.I neither was

5-she won't pass the exam, and….

1.I won't either 2.neither do I 3.so will I 4.Iwill either

6-I can read this book and …can he.

1.so 2.too 3.neither 4.either

7-we shouldn't talk loudly and you shouldn't……

1.so 2.too 3.neither 4.either

8-Ali doesn't play football and …Reza.

1.neither does 2.doesn,t either 3.so does 4.neither is

‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ‬

‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﺎﻋـﺪﺗﺎً ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻗﻴـﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﻧﻘـﺸﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨـﺪ‬،‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺍﺯﺻـﻔﺖ‬.‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬to be ‫ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬
.‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‬

٤٩
 ‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ‪Taste‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ‪look‬‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺷﺪﻥ ‪appear‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ‪seem‬‬
‫‪smell‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪feel‬‬
‫‪become‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫…‪1-He looks……..‬‬
‫‪*1.happy‬‬ ‫‪2 .happily‬‬

‫‪2-This soup tastes………....‬‬

‫‪*1.good‬‬ ‫‪2.well‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ‪ ..‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﺳﻤﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍﺳـﺖ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻫـﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺸﻤﺎﺭﻳﻢ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺯﻋﺪﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ a lot,same,many‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪I boke too bokes many boks alat boks‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺁﻧـﺎﻥ ‪ s‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ es‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﻗﺒـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ a,an,one‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ )ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎﺩﺭﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﭼﻨﺪﺗﺎﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍﺑـﺎ ﻋـﺪﺩ ﺷـﻤﺮﺩ ﻭ‪ s‬ﻧﻤـﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧـﺪ )ﺷـﻜﻞ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧـﺪ(‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ an‬ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ )ﺩﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ( )ﺍﻳﻨﻬـﺎ ﺩﺭﺟـﻮﺍﺏ ﭼﻘـﺪﺭ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ( ﻭﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪much‬ﻭ‪somy‬ﻭ‪ alot‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ ← Information‬ﻣﺜﻼً ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻫﺴﺘﺶ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭﺩﺭﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪ s‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪٥٠‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊ‬
‫‪Man‬‬ ‫‪men‬‬
‫‪Woman‬‬ ‫‪women‬‬
‫‪Child‬‬ ‫‪children‬‬
‫‪Foot‬‬ ‫‪feet‬‬
‫‪Tooth‬‬ ‫‪teeth‬‬
‫‪Fish‬‬ ‫‪fish‬‬
‫‪Mouse‬‬ ‫‪mice‬‬

‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ ‪":‬‬

‫‪Intelligence is the ability to use‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪Thought and knowledges to understand‬‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Thing and solve proble ms.‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ knowledges‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻫﺴﺘﺶ ﻭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪methan is a a odorless burning gas and is‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪the main ingredient of natural gas‬‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ O‬ﻫﺴﺘﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ an‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻱ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻲ ﺍﺯﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪Both,many,afew,several,fewer‬‬
‫‪Both of them have cars‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪another,each,every‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪alittle.much,less,amount‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪All,alotof,plenty of,enough,some,any,Lots of,most, More‬‬

‫‪٥١‬‬
 ‫* * ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ * * ) ﺩﺭﺍﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻱ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻲ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ (‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ )ﭘـﺲ ﺩﺭﺗـﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ( )ﺍﺳﻢ ( ‪) N+N‬ﺍﺳﻢ( ﺣﻜﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪Brain cell‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ‪ S‬ﺑﻪ ‪cell‬‬
‫‪Coffee cup‬‬ ‫→‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ‪s‬ﺑﻪ ‪ cup‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‬

‫‪Brains cells die at the rate of 100000‬‬

‫‪A‬‬
‫‪Per day by age 60,and they are‬‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Replaced Like other body cells.‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ A‬ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ‪ S‬ﻧﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭ‪ s‬ﻧﻤـﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪a ten- watts light bulb‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ )ﺻﻔﺖ(‬
‫‪a light bulb of ten-watts‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ of‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ s‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫‪a 16,000 pages book‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ)ﺻﻔﺖ(‬
‫‪a book of 16,000 pages‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻫﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ of‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ s‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬

‫‪Hundreds of‬‬
‫‪thousands of‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪+‬‬
‫‪Millions of‬‬
‫‪Trillions of‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺩﺭﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٢‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ‪many‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ‪much‬‬
‫‪a few‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ‪a little‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﻲ ‪few‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻛﻤﻲ ‪little‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ‪some‬‬ ‫‪some‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ‪a lot of‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ‪a lot of‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺍﺳﻢ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭﺍﮔـﺮ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪I-We need …….book.‬‬
‫‪*1.afew‬‬ ‫‪2.a little‬‬ ‫‪3.little‬‬ ‫‪4.much‬‬
‫‪II-we bought…..sugar.‬‬
‫‪1.afew‬‬ ‫‪* 2.a little‬‬ ‫‪3.many‬‬ ‫‪4.lot of‬‬

‫‪1-she has …..assignments to do.‬‬

‫‪*1. a few‬‬ ‫‪2. a little‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ -1‬ﺍﮔﺮﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﺍﻱ "‪"s‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪2-I need ……money‬‬
‫‪*1.a little‬‬ ‫‪2.afew‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ -2‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﭘﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ »ﻳـﻚ ﭘـﻮﻝ« ﻳـﺎ‬
‫»ﺻﺪﭘﻮﻝ« ﺑﻠﻜﻪ »ﺻﺪﺭﻳﺎﻝ«ﻳﺎ » ﺩﻩ ﺩﻻﺭ«‬
‫‪3-There are…..fish in the pool.‬‬
‫‪*1.a few‬‬ ‫‪2.alittle‬‬
‫‪ Fish‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ "‪ " s‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ -3‬ﺍﮔﺮﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑـﺎ ‪ There is‬ﺷـﺮﻭﻉ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪،‬ﻭﺍﮔـﺮ ﺑـﺎ ‪ There are‬ﺷـﺮﻭﻉ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪4-You have…..money, so you can't buy that bicycle.‬‬
‫‪1.a few‬‬ ‫‪2.few‬‬ ‫‪3.a little‬‬ ‫‪*4.little‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ -4‬ﭼﻮﻥ "‪ " Money‬ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ "‪ "c‬ﻳﺎ "‪ "d‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺩﺭﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪+A few‬‬ ‫‪+a little‬‬
‫‪-few‬‬ ‫‪-little‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ "‪ " few‬ﻭ"‪ " little‬ﭼـﻮﻥ ﺑـﺴﻴﺎﺭﻛﻢ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤـﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﻤـﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒـﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻧـﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺗﻌـﺪﺍﺩ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Bought………...honey.‬‬
‫‪1.a few‬‬ ‫‪*2.little‬‬ ‫‪3.few‬‬ ‫‪4.many‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ -5‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ only‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ"‪ "a few‬ﻭﻳﺎ "‪ "a little‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺧـﺎﻃﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺴﭙﺎﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Only‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪a few‬‬
‫‪Only‬‬
‫‪a little‬‬

‫‪Have only……books here.‬‬

‫‪* 1. few‬‬ ‫‪2.few‬‬ ‫‪3. much‬‬ ‫‪4.many‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺯﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫‪٥٤‬‬
 do , make

‫)ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺭﺩﺍﺭ( ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬an ‫ ﻭﻳﺎ‬a ‫ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎ‬make: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
Make a mistake
Make a difference
Make a comparison
Make a discovery
Make a profit
Make a suggestion
Make an investment
Make an offer
Make a prediction
Make use of ***

‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ a-an do ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬

do one's duty
do homework
do wrong
do business
do work
do damage
do wonder

1- do an assignment
2- do a service
3- do a kindness
a , an

a page (a-e u i o) ⇒ an
a unit ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬a‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻳﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ‬v ‫ﻫﺮﻭﻗﺖ‬

an understanding ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬an‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺁ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﺯ‬v ‫ﻫﺮﻭﻗﺖ‬

a uniform
an hour ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‬A ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ‬
a university
an orange

٥٥
 ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪The‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺷـﻨﻮﺩﻩ ﺷـﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ The‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ The‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺍﺳﻢ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻭﭼـﻪ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻭﭼـﻪ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭﭼـﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﺷـﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﻭﻟـﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ The‬ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﻱ ﺩﺭﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ The‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪The sun‬‬ ‫‪The sky‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ‬

‫‪The piano, The violin‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪The eagle‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻴﺎﻫﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻥ‬
‫‪The‬‬ ‫‪1800s‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺩﻫﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻗﺮﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪The twenties‬‬ ‫‪the 20th‬‬ ‫‪century‬‬
‫‪ -6‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪The morning‬‬ ‫‪The future‬‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪The afternoon‬‬ ‫‪The present‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪The evening‬‬ ‫‪The past‬‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪The front‬‬ ‫‪The top‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ‪The middle‬‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺖ ‪The back‬‬ ‫‪The bottom‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺟﻨﻮﺏ‪The south‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮﺏ‪The west‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﻝ ‪The North‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻕ‪The east‬‬
‫‪-7‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ‪ The‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ The‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪the first‬‬ ‫‪One,two,lesson7‬‬
‫‪The second‬‬
‫‪The third‬‬
‫‪The forth‬‬
‫‪The fifth‬‬

‫‪٥٦‬‬
 ‫‪ -8‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ ‪،‬ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ of‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪ the‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫‪The city of Tehran‬‬
‫‪Tehran city‬‬
‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﻲ ‪ the‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫‪The middle east‬‬
‫‪Asia‬‬
‫‪Europe‬‬
‫‪ -10‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻨﮕﻬﺎ ‪ the‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﺠﺰﺟﻨﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪The khandagh war‬‬
‫‪World war II‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ THE‬ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺩﺭﺗﺴﺘﻬﺎ(‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ the‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ‪ the‬ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ a‬ﻳﺎ‪ an‬ﻭﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪the‬ﻳﺎ ‪ a‬ﻳﺎ‪ an‬ﻭﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ‬

‫‪Coral reefs are limestone formations‬‬

‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪Composed of tiny sea organism and the remains.‬‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ REMAINS :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﻣﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ‪The‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺍﺯ‪ their‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٧‬‬
 ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‬،‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬،‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ‬،‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ‬

1-They saw me here, and…………..

1.so does he 2.he did too 3.neither does he 4.he didn,t either
2-You have helped us, and………
1.so does he 2.neithere has he 3.so he has 4.so has he
3-I can climb the trees, and………..
1.you can too 2.you do too 3.you can't either 4.so you can
4-we hadn't passed our exams, and……….
1.neithere he had 2.so had he 3.neithere had he 4.neithere did he
5-she won't come on time, and…………
1.neithere would I 2.neihere I will 3.Iwill too 4.neithere will I
6-He put it here, and………..
1.I did too 2.Ididn,t either 3.I do too 4.I don't either
7-I didn,t pass my exam, and……
1.neithere he did 2.he did either
3.neithere does he 4.he didn,t either
8-My brother can type the letters, and….you.
1.so can 2.so do 3.neithere can 4.neithere do
9-she is interested in chemistry, and…….my brothers.
1.so is 2.are too 3.so are 4.neithere are
10-I was absent ,and……were they.
1.so 2.too 3.eithere 4.neithere
11-she hasn't student it, and I haven't…………
1.so 2.too 3.neithere 4.eithere
12-I have only…..money in my pocket.
1.afew 2.few 3.alittle 4.little
13-This food smells……..I can't eat it.
1.badly 2.goood 3.bad 4.well
14-Don,t let any one ……in your affairs.
1.to meddle 2.meddle 3.meddling 4.meddled
15-Today is…………warmer than yesterday. we should go swimming.
1.very 2.so 3.much 4.too
16-He had a very old car……..I.
1.so had 2.so did 3.neithere had 4.neithere did
17-Ali wasn't interested in watching TV and……..
1.neithere did I 2.Iwas too 3.neithere was I 4.neithere I was

٥٨
18-The car would be out of order if we………it.
1.doesn,t start 2.hadn,t started 3.haven,t started 4.didn,t start
19-Parsa usually drives ………than his friend.
1.faster 2.more fast 3.fastly 4.more fastly
20-The teacher made the students………the passage loudly.
1.reading 2.to read 3.read 4.are reading

٥٩
 ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ‬

‫‪-3‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ‪ -2‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ‬

‫‪)Clause‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ( ⇐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪ -1: clause‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪-2‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪-3‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪) adjective clausel‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪) : CLause‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ(‪Noun Clause‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺘﻲ( ‪)Adverbial Clause‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ(‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ‪Noun clause‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺳﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ(ﻭﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﺮﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪﺍﻳﻔﺎﻛﻨﺪﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ)ﻧﻘﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ ‪-1:‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ‪-2‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ‪-‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ )ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪+‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪:‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ)‪( preposition‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪from…to-since-for-on-in-at-With-abut‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪:‬ﻫﺮﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪:‬ﻫﺮﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩﺿﻤﻴﺮﻧﻴﺰﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪:‬ﺿﻤﻴﺮﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﺁﻥ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﭘﺲ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﻤﻴﺮﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ)ﺩﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ‪) conector‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ(ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﮔﺮﺳﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭﺍﮔﺮﭼﻬﺎﺭﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪,when,what,where,why,how,what ever,when ever,that is,whether‬‬

‫‪Ncl= c + s + v‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪ +‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪﻭﺧﻮﺩﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﻴﺰﺍﻳﻔﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٠‬‬
Who what whieh
Who ever what ever whichever

NcL = CS + V
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬CS ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬+‫ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬That :‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬
I k now when he wi ll arrive
I am concerned about whe he will arvive
:‫ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‬:‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
Am- is- are - was - were- can- could - may – might-
Should - shall - must - have - has - hut

When he will arrive is not important

‫ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ‬:‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‬:‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
Was LaTe caused many problems
A) the driver * B)thuR he
c)There D)Because
‫ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻳـﻚ ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﻫـﻢ ﺩﺭﻛﻨـﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﻓﻌـﻞ‬:‫ﺟﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬

It is only in the Last zoo years…………………….

have begun climbing mountains

A) because people * B)that people

c)people D)as people

in a 1988 advaned officers program

sumpson developed a plan to incorporate
police in inforciny environmental protection
laws when ever …..feasible. \ → ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬
*A) it is b)is c)has d)it has
‫)ﻭﻳﺮﮔﻮﻝ( ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ )ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ( ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬،‫ ﺩﺭﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬:‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﻣﺎﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ‬
……….. + v (obj) + v (obj)

٦١
‫‪*A)what‬‬ ‫‪* A)that it‬‬
‫‪B)how‬‬ ‫‪B)Which it‬‬
‫‪C)when‬‬ ‫‪C)if‬‬
‫‪D)if‬‬ ‫‪D)that‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺜـﻞ ‪ what‬ﻭﺑﺮﺧـﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ that‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺁﻥ ‪ it‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ‪Adverbial Clause‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺤـﺚ ﺷـﺪ ﻭﻧﻘـﺶ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔـﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻨـﺪ‬
‫)ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ( ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﻴـﺪﻫﺎ ﭼﮕـﻮﻧﮕﻲ ‪،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻠـﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻀﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺎﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫‪I will sign the check before‬‬ ‫‪you leave‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ before‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﺯ ‪ before‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪Before you leave‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪I will sign the check‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪)1‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ( ‪Time‬‬ ‫‪) 2‬ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ( ‪cause‬‬
‫‪After‬‬ ‫‪as‬‬
‫‪As‬‬ ‫‪because‬‬
‫‪As long as‬‬ ‫‪in as much as‬‬
‫‪Assoonas‬‬ ‫‪Now that‬‬
‫‪Before‬‬ ‫‪since‬‬
‫‪By the time‬‬
‫‪Once‬‬
‫‪Since‬‬ ‫‪)3‬ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ( ‪condition‬‬
‫‪Until‬‬ ‫‪if‬‬
‫‪When‬‬ ‫‪in case‬‬

‫‪٦٢‬‬
Whenever provided
While providing
While unless
Whether
contrast‫ ﺗﻀﺎﺩﻱ‬4 manner‫ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ‬6
although As
though In that
even though ‫ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‬that ‫ﺑﺎ‬
Even though
While
Wheras

place ‫ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬5
Where
Where ever

when ever :‫ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
whether-when-where-if

...................... Was Late , I missed the appointment

A)I B)Because C)the train * D)since he
‫ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻱ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬since‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ‬
........... Come , you'll be wel come.
A)you will B)you C)when ever * D)when ever you

You will get a good grade on the exam

Provided ………………………..
A)studying C)to study
B) study * D)you study
‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬provided ‫ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬: ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬

……hale Telescope , at the Palomar observatory in southere

California , people can photograph objects several billion light years a way.
A)The * B)with the C)they are D) it is the

‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﻩ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬4‫ﻭ‬3 ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ ﺍﺿﺎﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻲ‬the ‫ﻭﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬

٦٣
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ) ‪ ( people‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ ﺳـﻮﻡ ﺩﺭﺳـﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺯﻳـﺮﺍ ‪ with‬ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ hale telescope‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪A mony human chromosomes , they chromosome is unvsvol …….. most‬‬

‫‪of the chromosome does not participate in meiotic recombination‬‬
‫‪A) in‬‬ ‫‪B)so‬‬ ‫‪c) and‬‬ ‫‪* D)in that‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫‪S +v‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪s +v‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ‪:1‬‬
‫‪S+v,‬‬ ‫‪cc‬‬ ‫‪s +v‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ‪: 2‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ‪ 1‬ﺍﮔﺮﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻘـﺶ ﻣﻔﻌـﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﻩ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟـﺎﻱ ﺧـﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﻩ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺍﺳـﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨـﮓ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪﻩ ﺍﺯﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻗﻴـﺪﻱ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ) ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻀﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ(‬
‫‪S+v‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬
‫‪s+v‬‬

‫‪A)and‬‬ ‫‪C)Becanse‬‬
‫‪B)when‬‬ ‫‪D) althongh‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ‪ and‬ﺟﺰﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭﻓﺮﻣـﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﻮﺩ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔﺮﭼـﻪ ﺟﺰﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﻗﻴـﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺟﺰ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻀﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ 4‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺯﻳـﺮﺍ ﺟـﺰ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻀﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ‪3‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪......s+v,s+v‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‬

‫‪٦٤‬‬
 ‫‪Rednced Adv .cl‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪+‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ +‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﮔﺮﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯﺷـﻜﻞ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻓﻌـﻞ ‪ To be‬ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ) ﻣﺜﻼً ‪ ( s,ed‬ﻭﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣـﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳـﻢ ﺁﻧﮕـﺎﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺯﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﺪﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﭼـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ) ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ( ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﻏﻴﺮﺍﺯﻓﻌﻞ ‪ tobe‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪feeling‬‬

‫‪although‬‬ ‫‪he is unwell‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪he will take part in the seminar.‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ is‬ﻫﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪ tobe‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪when‬‬ ‫‪you gave your speech‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫…‪you should‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing,gave‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ) ﺗﺬﻛﺮﺍﻳﻨﻜـﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ( ‪gaiving‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻗﻴـﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪after the space probe sent pictures‬‬ ‫‪, astronomers examined them.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‬

‫‪In 1987 a Canadian astronomer , I an shelton‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫……‪spotted a supernova‬‬

‫‪looking at some photographs of the stars‬‬

‫‪A)was‬‬ ‫‪B)during‬‬ ‫‪C) as of‬‬ ‫‪* D) while he was‬‬

‫‪٦٥‬‬
 ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ‪adjective clausel‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺭﺍﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺗﻮﺻـﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳـﻚ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻـﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻫﺮﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ‪ +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ +‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫‪ -‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫)‪whom,which,that ( s+v‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻭﻝ )ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪+‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ (‬
‫‪whom,which,that‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻭﻡ ) ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ (‬

‫‪The woman is filling the glass‬‬ ‫‪that‬‬ ‫‪she put on the table .‬‬
‫‪ glass‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﺶ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‬

‫‪- The gift ………..selected for the bride was expensive‬‬

‫‪A)because‬‬ ‫‪B) was‬‬ ‫‪C)since‬‬ ‫‪*D) which we‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻫﺮﺩﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪………...is on the table has lover section‬‬
‫‪A)the note book‬‬
‫‪*B) the note book which‬‬
‫‪C)Because the notebook‬‬
‫‪D)In the note book‬‬

‫‪The fact …………..the most important rating period is about to begin has‬‬
‫‪caused all the net work to shore up their schedules.‬‬
‫‪A)is that‬‬ ‫‪B)of‬‬ ‫‪* C) that‬‬ ‫‪D)what‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺳـﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﻭﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﻭﺗـﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻧﻴﺰﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺯﻳـﺮﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩﻱ ﻛـﻪ ‪what‬‬

‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺰ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ the fact‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬

‫‪Reduce Adj CL‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﻩ ﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﻫـﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭﻫﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫـﻴﭻ ﮔـﺎﻩ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﺻـﻔﺘﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﻩ ‪ whom‬ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻴـﺴﺖ ﭘـﺲ ﻓﻘـﻂ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨـﺪﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ ‪who‬ﻭ‪which‬ﻭ ‪ that‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‬

‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ )ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫـﺎﻱ ﻗﻴـﺪﻱ ( ﻣـﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧـﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﮔﺮﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻌـﻞ ‪ tobe‬ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ tobe‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺏ(ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ tobe‬ﺑﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻭﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪The woman who‬‬ ‫‪is waring to us is the tour guide‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ‪ who‬ﺍﺯﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ is‬ﺭﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ‪ who‬ﻫﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬

‫‪I don’t understand the article‬‬ ‫‪which‬‬ ‫‪appears in today's paper‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‪ :‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ‪ which‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻌـﺪﺍﺯﺁﻥ ‪tobe‬ﻧﻴـﺴﺖ ‪ s‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣـﺬﻑ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿـﺎﻑ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Appearing‬‬

‫‪The letter‬‬ ‫‪which‬‬ ‫‪you sent me arrived yesterday.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﻭﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫـﻴﻢ ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﻛـﻞ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪The man‬‬ ‫‪who‬‬ ‫‪is playing is my friend .‬‬

‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﻳـﻚ ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺸﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻛﻼً ﺩﺭﺩﻭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ‪who‬ﻭ ‪ is‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬

‫‪The man‬‬ ‫‪whom‬‬ ‫‪I met was well known.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﭘﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ whom‬ﺭﺍﺣـﺬﻑ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﻭﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪﻩ ﺑـﺎ ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ‪ whom‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺑﺒـﺮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔـﺮ ‪ whom‬ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﻛـﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪According to Legend‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪Bet sy Ross was the *woman …..the Birst American‬‬
‫‪stars‬‬
‫‪A) woman she made‬‬ ‫‪B)made‬‬ ‫‪* C) who made‬‬ ‫‪D)and she made .‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Dragonflies feed on a large variety of insects…..cateh in flight.‬‬

‫‪A) in which they‬‬ ‫‪*B)which they C)there are to‬‬ ‫‪D)there are a‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪( Inversion) :‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ) ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﭘﻨﺞ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪how,why,where,when,what‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪It is the homework.‬‬
‫?‪What is the homework‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ) ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ( ﺟﺰء ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎ ﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫـﺎ ﻧﻴﺰﺑﻮﺩﻧـﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳـﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﻩ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‬
‫‪I don’t know‬‬ ‫‪what‬‬ ‫‪the home work is.‬‬

‫‪Could‬‬ ‫? ‪you tell me what your name is‬‬

‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ) ‪5‬ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ( ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺭﺍﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟـﺎﻱ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻭﻓﺎﻋـﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺽ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪The lawyer asked the client why……………..it.‬‬

‫‪A) did he do‬‬ ‫‪B)did he‬‬ ‫‪* C) he did‬‬ ‫‪D) did‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﻓﻌـﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ )‪ ( asked –did‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﻭﺩﻭﻓﺎﻋـﻞ )‪ ( he –the lawyer‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳـﻢ ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ why‬ﺩﺭﻧﻘﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‪ why‬ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻟﻒ( ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ‬
‫‪There are the keys that I thought I lost.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫‪Here is the book that you lent me.‬‬

‫)ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ (‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺏ( ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ +‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪Around‬‬ ‫‪the corner‬‬

‫‪Beyond‬‬ ‫‪the mountain‬‬

‫‪On the second level of the parking lot….‬‬

‫‪A)is empty‬‬ ‫‪B)are empty‬‬
‫‪C)some empty stalls are‬‬ ‫‪* D) are some empty stalls‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ A,B‬ﻣﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ c‬ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ) ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ( ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺩﺭﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﻫـﻢ ﻓﻌـﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭﻫﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﻩ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Neither,Nor,seldom‬‬
‫‪No,Not,Never,only‬‬
‫‪Hardly,barely,scarcely‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺪﺍ ﺯ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻭﺳـﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ ) ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧـﻪ ﺳـﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ (‬

‫‪٦٩‬‬
Never has Ali taken a vacation
Not once I missed a question
Not once did I miss a question.

‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻣـﺎ‬Not ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ ﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﻭﺳـﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﻭﺩﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳـﺖ‬did ‫( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬ed) ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬ed ‫ ( ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬miss ) ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

Hardly ever he takes time off.

Hardly ever dose he take time off.

Only in extremely dangerous situation…stopped.

A)will be the printing presses
B)the printing presses will be
c)that the printing presses will be
*D) will the printing press be
Does seldom a computer make a mistake.
A B C D
.‫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‬seldo m ‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬Does ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﺢ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻫﺎ‬-4
‫ ﺍﺳﺖ‬IF ‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ‬WERE,SHOULD,HAD ‫ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
. ‫ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬IF‫ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
If he had taken more time, the results
had he taken more time, the results
would have been better.

…………….you see frank at the conference, give him my regard.

*A)Should B)would C) might D) Could

‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜـﻲ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻌﻞ‬

Only by working three jobs …..able to support his large family.

A)he was B)he is C)he's being * D)was he

٧٠
 The report would have been accepted…..in checking its accuracy.
A)if more care
B)more care had been taken
C)had taken more care
*D)had more care been taken

‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ‬shoud,had,were ‫ ﺩﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧـﻪ ﺳـﺎﺯﻱ ﻣـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬
.‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬if ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻧﻪ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ‬

‫ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ‬-5

My sister spends more hours than john.
My sister spends more hours than john does.
My sister spends more hours than john does john.

.‫ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬3 ‫ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
The results of the current experiment appear to be more consistent than….the
results of any previous tests.
A)them * B)were C)they were D) were they

Located behind….the two Lacrimal glands.

A) each eyelid B)is each eyelid
*C)each eyelid are D)each eyelid which is

‫ ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬IS B ‫ﺩﺭﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ‬، ‫ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬:‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
each eyelid c ‫ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﻣﻔﻌـﻮﻝ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻳـﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ‬behind ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬
‫ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﺶ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﺁﻣـﺪﻩ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﻪ‬are ‫ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬behind ‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
. ‫ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﭘﺲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬D

٧١
 ‫ﺑﺪﻝ ‪Appositive‬‬

‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻧﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻧﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭﺑﻮﺩﻭﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﺮﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﺮﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ )ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪-‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﻔﻌـﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪،‬ﻧﻘـﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ( ﭘﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭﻫﺮﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺑﺪﻝ ﺧﻮﺩﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ -5‬ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺟﻨﺲ ﺑﺪﻝ ﻭﺟﻨﺲ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻼً ﺍﮔـﺮ ﻓﺎﻋـﻞ ﺷـﻲ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺑـﺪﻝ ﻧﻴـﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ -6‬ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﻝ‪:‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ,‬ﺑﺪﻝ ‪ ,‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪,‬‬

‫‪Sally‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪the best student in the class‬‬ ‫‪, got an a on the exam.‬‬

‫‪...................‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪George ,‬‬ ‫‪is attending the Lecture.‬‬

‫‪A)Right now‬‬ ‫‪C)Because of the time‬‬
‫‪B)Happily‬‬ ‫‪* D)my friend‬‬

‫‪John , the messiest eater at the table,‬‬

‫‪Spewed mashed potatoes Like an erupting volcano.‬‬

‫‪................ ,‬‬ ‫‪Sarah ravely misses her basketball shot.‬‬

‫‪*A) an excellent basketball player‬‬
‫‪B) …………………………………….‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬
‫‪C) Sarah is an excellent basket ball play‬‬
‫‪D) her excellent basket ball play‬‬

‫‪٧٢‬‬
 ( parallelism) ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﺍﺭ )ﺳـﺮﻱ( ﺍﺭﺍﺋـﻪ ﻛﻨﻨـﺪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺳـﺮﻱ ﻫـﺎ ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻣـﺮﻱ ﻳﻜـﺴﺎﻥ ﻫـﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻴـﭗ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‬
: ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬، ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺻﻔﺘﻬﺎ‬-1
it is destroyed by heat ,storage, or exposure to air. : ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ‬
it prevents heart disease, speeds wound healing and helps gun disease. :‫ﺏ(ﻓﻌﻞ‬
it can be prepared naturally and sy the tidally.:‫ﺝ(ﻗﻴﺪ‬
it can be bought in the form of crystals or in the form of grannles. : ‫ﺩ(ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
they tend to disintegrate and to fall apart.:‫ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬-2
:‫ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬-3
claims for vitamin c such as reducing
Stress and improving Tahiti…………

vitamin c boosts immunity against colds,

………asthma, and helps Maintau good vision.
A)counteracting C) will counteract
*B) counteracts D) it A contere to
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬s ‫ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺩﺭﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺏ ﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻌﻞ‬s ‫ﺩﺭﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
symptoms of mild vitamin c may be
Weakness, irritability, loosing weight, and apathy.

.‫ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭﺁﻥ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬ing ‫ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ‬c :‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬

- some one favor the garage phoned to say
That the car had been fixed and asking
G we would piek it up by 5:00

.‫ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬phoned ‫ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ‬ed ‫ﻏﻠﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬D :‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬

٧٣
 ‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﻭﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﺷﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ‪ :‬ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺷﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﮔﻔـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺍﻧﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﻠـﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠـﻲ )ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﻧـﺪ( ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺑﮕﻴـﺮﺩﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪:‬ﮔﻢ ﺷﺪ‪-‬ﻛﺸﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪-‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪-‬ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‬

‫ﻃﺮﺯﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‪) :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ(‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﺟﺪﺍﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﺩﺭﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺯﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪).‬ﺍﮔﺮﻓﻌﻞ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣـﺎﻝ ‪to be‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﮔﺮﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺍﺯﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ‪ to be‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ -4‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪They clean the house‬‬ ‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍﺗﻤﻴﺰﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫‪The house is cleaned‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪You write the letters‬‬ ‫‪The letters are written.‬‬

‫‪I help the poor boy‬‬ ‫‪The poor boy is helped‬‬

‫‪We closed the door‬‬

‫‪The door was closed‬‬
‫‪He mailed the cards‬‬ ‫‪The cards were mailed‬‬

‫‪٧٤‬‬
 ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬
Am
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ Is + p.p
‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ are

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ Was

+ p.p
Were

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬

They have cleaned the house

House has been cleaned

been ‫ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ‬،‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬had ‫ ﻳﺎ‬has, have ‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
.‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‬

you have seen him. He has been seen.‫ﻧﻘﻠﻲ‬

she has sold the cars The cars have been sold. ‫ﻧﻘﻠﻲ‬
they had washed the car. The car had been washed.‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬
my father had punished me I had been punished.‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬

٧٥
 ‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫‪Have‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪+been+p.p‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Has‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪Had+been+p.p‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬

‫‪they will clean the house‬‬

‫‪the house will be cleaned‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ be‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪You should help the poor.‬‬ ‫‪The poor should be helped.‬‬
‫‪We can speak French here‬‬ ‫‪French can be spoken here.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪Will + be+p.p‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬

‫‪am‬‬ ‫‪Have‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪Is‬‬ ‫‪+pp‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪+been+p.p‬‬
‫‪are‬‬ ‫‪Has‬‬

‫‪was‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪Had‬‬ ‫‪+been+pp‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪+p.p‬‬
‫‪Wer‬‬
‫‪ Will‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪+be+p.p‬‬

‫‪٧٦‬‬
 .‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬p.p ‫ﺍﮔﺮﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ‬
1.The walls…….last week.
1.painted *2.were painted 3.will painted 4.will be painted
2-The letters …..tomorrow
1.posted 2.willpost *3.willlbe posted 4.were posted
3-The class…before students came into.
*1.had been cleaned 2.cleaned
3.are cleaned 4.had cleaned
4.we….this refrigerator since last year.
*1.have bought 2.bought
3.have been bought 4.were bought
5-He …..yesterday.
1.killed * 2.was killed 3.killls 4.killed
6-This car….a lot of gasoline every day.
*1.uses 2.used 3.is used 4.was used
7-The contract………by the president.
1.signed * 2.was signed 3.willsigne 4.has signed

.‫ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬b ‫ ﺧﻮﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺤﻬﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻓﻘﻂ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬By

: ‫ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ ﺩﺍﺭ‬ing
‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬
to‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‬

٧٧
 ‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ‬

‫‪put on-look for‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﺪﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﻭﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺟﺰء ﺩﻭﻣﺶ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﺸﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬

‫‪For –of-to-at-in-about- with-after‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯﺗـﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺿـﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺪﺍﻧﺸﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫‪1-does he put on his coat? Yes, he puts………….‬‬
‫‪1-on it‬‬ ‫‪* 2.it on‬‬ ‫‪3.on them‬‬ ‫‪4.them on‬‬

‫‪2-do you look for the books? Yes, I look………….‬‬

‫‪1for it‬‬ ‫‪2.it for‬‬ ‫‪* 3.for them‬‬ ‫‪4.them for‬‬

‫‪3-do they take off their shirts? Yes, they take………..‬‬

‫‪1. off them‬‬ ‫‪2.off it‬‬ ‫‪3.if off‬‬ ‫‪* 4. them off‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ of‬ﺑﺎ ‪ off‬ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪if‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ‬

‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺯﺩﻭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-1‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ if‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﻨﻮﻳﺴﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ ,‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ,‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫‪ Tomorrow‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪/‬ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ‪ ,‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪1-‬‬
‫‪If I Study hard, I will pass the exam tomorrow‬‬

‫‪ now /to morrow‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪2-‬‬

‫‪If I studied hard, I would pass the exam.‬‬

‫‪ Yesterday‬ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪3-‬‬

‫‪If I had studied hard, I would hare passed the exam.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :1‬ﺩﺭﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ will‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ‪ May can.‬ﻭ ‪ must‬ﻭﻏﻴـﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪ whould‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ could‬ﻭ‪ must‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :2‬ﺩﺭﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻱ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪if you are too hot, take your coat off.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :3‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ‪ was‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪ wove‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪I were you, I wouldn’t buy that car.‬‬

‫‪٧٩‬‬
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ‬

1-she saw me while I……………tennis.

1.am playing 2.will play 3.play 4.was playing
2-You would accept what he told you if I……you.
1.asked 2.ask 3.had asked 4.willask
3.My brother had finished his home work before…out.
1.went 2.to go 3.going 4 had gone
4-why didn,t you let your brother …you in your work?
1.help 2.to help 3.helping 4.helped
5-I wish …..him as soon as possible.
1.saw 2.to see 3.had seen 4. Would see
6-I knew the girl to….you were talking.
1.who 2.whom 3.whose 4.which
7-These days women can work as …..as men.
1.good 2.well 3.bettter 4.the best
8-The letters…….care fully yet.
1. haven,t studied 2.have studied
3haven,t been studied 4.have been studied
9-My computer functions…than yours.
1.slower 2.slowly 3.more slowly 4.more slow
10-After my travel. I decided……a good car.
1.buy 2.buying 3.to buy 4.bought
11-The books …next week.
1.buy 2.will buy 3.will be buy 4.can be bought
12-My brother never helped me ,….?
1.does he 2.did my brother 3.did he 4.is he
13-You don't walk to school and ….do I.
1.so 2.neither 3.too 4.eithere
14-we can buy a house here and …you.
1.so do 2.can too 3.so can 4.tooo can
15-we wanted to buy the bicycle ,but we had only….money.
1.afew 2.few 3.a little 4. Little
16-we had …..guests in the house, so we went out.
1.any 2.no 3.not 4.none
17-This soup tastes….That is why I can't eat it.
1.good 2.badly 3. Bad 4.well

٨٠
18-My father …..be fore we could help him.
1.injured 2.had injured 3.injures 4.had been injured
19-I could hear my friends in the room….beautifully.
1.singing 2.to sing 3.sang 4.sung
20-Today I am ……better than yesterday.
1.very 2.too 3.much 4.so

٨١
 ‫‪So-such-Too-Enough‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ‪very+‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪+to‬ﺻﻔﺖ‪too+‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪+that+‬ﺻﻔﺖ‪so+‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪+that+‬ﺍﺳﻢ‪+‬ﺻﻔﺖ‪such +‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪+ enough+ to‬ﺻﻔﺖ‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫‪ :Very‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺗﻤـﻪ ﻣـﻲ ﻳﺎﺑـﺪ‪.‬ﺩﺭﻣـﻮﺭﺩ‪ very‬ﻫﻴﭽﮕـﺎﻩ ﻧﺘﻴﺠـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪He is very old.‬‬ ‫‪He works very slowly‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪+to‬ﺻﻔﺖ‪Too+‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪He is very old‬‬
‫‪ Too‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ very‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ very‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪He is too old‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ too‬ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪ to‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺷـﺪﺕ‪too‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭﺯﻳﺎﺩﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪He is too old to work.‬‬
‫‪I am too fat to run‬‬

‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧـﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮﺑـﺴﭙﺎﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ too‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺍً ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺗﻐﻴﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺌﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪+to‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪+for+‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪to+‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫‪This basket is too heavy for me to carry.‬‬

‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪+that+‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪so+‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‪ so‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﺎﻗﻴﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺁﻥ ‪ that‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪﺍﺯ‪ that‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ too‬ﺑﻪ ‪ so‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺮﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪He is too old to work.‬‬
‫‪He is so old that he can't work.‬‬

‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺍً ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺍﻣـﺎ ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬ﺍﻣـﺎ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻫـﻢ ﺍﺯﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻭﻫﻢ ﺍﺯﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪He is too tired to play.‬‬ ‫‪He is so tired that he can't play‬‬

‫‪Such‬‬
‫‪Such a‬‬ ‫‪+ That‬ﺍﺳﻢ‪+‬ﺻﻔﺖ‬
‫‪Such an‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‪ such‬ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪that‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ such‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪ so‬ﻭ‪ such‬ﺩﺭﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬

‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ that‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ so‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ that‬ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ such‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Such‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Such –such a-such an‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪It is………heavy table that we can, lift it.‬‬
‫‪1.so‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4.such an‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‪ that‬ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ a‬ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﻣـﻲ ﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ table‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪ such‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣـﻲ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻨـﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ b‬ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﮔﺮﺻﻔﺖ ﺑـﺎ ﺣـﺮﻭﻑ ﺻـﺪﺍ ﺩﺍﺭ‪ a-e-i-o-u‬ﺷـﺮﻭﻉ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺍﺯ‪ such an‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﮔﺮﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ such a‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ c‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪1- he is…….clever boy that he can memorize this book easily.‬‬
‫‪1.‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪* 3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬
‫‪2-they are ……..cheap cars that we can buy them all.‬‬
‫‪1. so‬‬ ‫‪*2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬
‫‪3-she is……excited girl that she can't control herself‬‬
‫‪1. so‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪* 4. such an‬‬
‫‪4-saw…………interning films that I never forget them.‬‬
‫‪1. so‬‬ ‫‪*2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬
‫‪5-…is……honest boy that every body can trust in him.‬‬
‫‪1.so‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪* 4. such an‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪hour‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪honor‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺨﺎﺭ‬
‫‪honest‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﻕ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺳﺘﮕﻮ‬

‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ »‪ «h‬ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺣـﺮﻑ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ»‪ «o‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ »‪ «a‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺍﺯ»‪ «an‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1-Today we have ……..cold weather that we can't go out.‬‬

‫‪1.so‬‬ ‫‪* 2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻴﺰﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ such‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪This road is…….far away that we should take a taxi.‬‬
‫‪* 1.so‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬

‫‪We are …….amused that we like to stay here more.‬‬

‫»‪«far away‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ»ﺩﻭﺭ«‬
‫‪*1.so‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ that‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪He has……much money that he can buy a big house.‬‬
‫‪1.so‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‪ that‬ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛـﻪ ﻧﻘـﺶ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﺍﺭﺍﺳـﺖ ﻳﻜـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ ‪a few,‬‬
‫‪ much, many‬ﻳﺎ ‪ little‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ‪ so‬ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮﻣﻬﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪I bought …….house that every one gets surprised while knowing it.‬‬
‫‪1.so‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪* 3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ that‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻭﻟـﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﺍﺳـﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‪ that‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ‪ so‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﻗﺒـﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪that‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ such‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬
‫‪She is…….old that she can't walk.‬‬
‫‪*1.so‬‬ ‫‪2.such‬‬ ‫‪3.such a‬‬ ‫‪4. such an‬‬

‫‪٨٥‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
She has…..friends that she can trust in them all.
1.so * 2.such 3.such a 4. such an

‫ ﺻﻔﺖ‬+enough+to‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

too ‫ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﺎﻗﻴـﺪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬too ‫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬to‫ ﻧﻴﺰﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‬enough‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
.‫ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬enough ‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬

too+‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬+to‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬+enough+to‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬

he is…….old to work
*1.too 2.enough
He is old ……to work
1.too * 2.enough
He isn't…….to buy this car.
1.too rich * 2.rich enough 3.so rich 4.such a rich

.‫« ﻏﻠﻂ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬d»‫«ﻭ‬c» ‫ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬to‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬too ‫ﺯﻳﺮﺍﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬، ‫ ﻫﻢ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‬a ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬

He is….to buy the car.

1.too rich * 2.rich enough

٨٦
 ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ a‬ﺍﺯﻧﻈﺮﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭﺛﺮﻭﺗﻤﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﺨﺮﺩ« ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺩﺭﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪too‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ »‪ «b‬ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ».‬ﺍﻭﺑﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺛﺮﻭﺗﻤﻨﺪﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﺨﺮﺩ«‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬ ‫‪Enough‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯﻧﻈﺮﻣﻌﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Too‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫‪Enough‬‬

‫‪I am ….to lift this box.‬‬

‫‪1.too strong‬‬ ‫‪* 2.strong enough‬‬

‫‪You are………to work.‬‬

‫‪*1.too lazy‬‬ ‫‪2.lazly enough‬‬

‫‪Fetch me the chairs in the yard.‬‬

‫‪But I am….to work any more.‬‬

‫‪*1.too sleepy 2-sleepy enough‬‬

‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛـﻪ ‪ enough‬ﻭﺟـﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳـﻤﻲ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫـﺪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﺩ ﺍﺳـﻢ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ‪ enough‬ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪+ enough+to‬ﺻﻔﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‪+ to‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪enough+‬‬

‫‪I have enough money to help you.‬‬

‫‪٨٧‬‬
 ‫‪Some-any‬‬

‫‪ Some‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ »ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ« ﻳﺎ » ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ« ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Any‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ »ﻫﻴﭻ« ﻳﺎ »ﻫﺮ« ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ some‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪some‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬

‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫‪Any‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‪There is some sugar in the bowl.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‪There isn't any sugar in the bowl.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪Is there any sugar in the bowl.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ some‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫?‪Do you drink some more coffee‬‬

‫‪No-any‬‬

‫‪ No‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻣـﺎ ‪ any‬ﺩﺭﺟﻤـﻼﺕ ﺑـﺎ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯﻧﻈـﺮ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﻫـﺮﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪there aren't any pens here.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‪There are no pens here.‬‬

‫‪I don't see any one .‬‬

‫‪I see no one.‬‬

‫‪I didn,t help……last week.‬‬

‫‪*1.any body‬‬ ‫‪2.no body‬‬ ‫‪3.some body‬‬ ‫‪4.not body‬‬

‫‪٨٨‬‬
 some-any-No-So-such-Too-Enough ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬

1- I know your father is…….old to walk home.

1.very 2.so * 3.too 4.such an
2-The weather was ….fine that we decided to go swimming.
1.so 2.very 3.too 4.such a
3-I have …..interesting films that my friends borrow them every week.
1.so *2.such 3.such an 4.very
4-He was…….fat boy that he could hardly run.
1.so 2.such * 3.such a 4.such an
5- I have ….money to buy this house.
1.too 2.very * 3.such 4.enough
6-she isn't……to reach the ceiling.
1.too tall * 2.tall enough 3.so tall 4.such a tall
7-My son is …….to know the reason of my decision.
1.so experienced 2.very experienced
3.too experienced * 4. experienced enough.
8-He is……happy today that he can't control himself.
1.so *2.such a 3.such 4.too
9-Ihad ….much home work to do that I didn,t know how to finish it.
1.such 2.too * 3.so 4.such a
10-The house was. big one that we had to buy more furniture to fill it.
1.so * 2.such a 3.such an 4.very
11-The room is…….small for us to live in
1.so * 2.too 3.such 4.very
12-The weather was ….fine at the beach that we decided to go swimming.
1-Very 2-such a 3- too * 4-so
13-There is……..sugar in my cup.
1.no 2.any * 3.not some 4.none
14-He is ………to finish his work on time.
*1.too lazy 2.lazy enough 3.so lazy that 4.such as lazy
15-Iam …..to solve these problems easily.
1.to clever 2.so clever 3.such clever * 4.clever enough
16-The children are playing …….happily in the yard that you can hear them
very well.
*1.so 2.such as 3.very 4.such
17-I think you have ….time to do the job well.

٨٩
1.many * 2.enough 3.too 4.very
18-stand on the chair and fix the lamp.
But I am …to reach the ceiling.
1.very tall 2.too tall 3.so tall * 4.tall enough
19-we went to pool instead of ……to the cinema.
1.go 2.went 3.gone *4.going
20-The house they wanted was too expensive for them……..
1.to rent 2.rent * 3.renting 4.for renting

٩٠
 ‫‪Have to. Has to. Had to‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺑـﻪ ﻣﻌﻨـﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭﺑـﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺩﺍﺭﺩﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻛﻠﻤـﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﻤـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺑﻮﺳـﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺷﺎﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Does, Do‬ﻳﺎ‪ Did‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪They have to come‬‬ ‫?‪Do they have to come‬‬

‫‪He has to come‬‬ ‫?‪Does he have to come‬‬
‫‪We had to come‬‬ ‫?‪Did you have to come‬‬

‫?…‪1-He has to obey the traffic laws,‬‬

‫‪1-has he‬‬ ‫‪2-hasn, the‬‬ ‫‪3.does to‬‬ ‫‪*4.doesn, t he‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﭼﻮﻥ ‪ has to‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍﺑﺎ‪ does‬ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬‬
‫?…‪2-He has to obeyed the traffic laws,‬‬
‫‪1- He has he‬‬ ‫‪*2.hasn,t he‬‬ ‫‪3.does to‬‬ ‫‪4.doesn,t‬‬

‫ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﭼﻮﻥ ‪ has‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪) used to‬ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً(‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﭘـﺲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺳـﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻳـﺎ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﻛـﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﻴـﺸﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻌـﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ did‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ d‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ did used to‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪I used to live in karag.‬‬
‫‪She didn’t use to smoke.‬‬

‫?‪Did you use to work in a bank‬‬

‫‪She didn’t used to smoke.‬‬

‫‪I …………tv a lot , but t don’t anymore.‬‬
‫‪A) was watching‬‬ ‫‪B) was used to watch‬‬ ‫‪* C) used to watch‬‬

‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪Must have p.p - May/Might have p.p - Could have p.p - Should have p.p‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪He should ….you .(to help‬‬

‫‪He should………you yesterday.(to help).‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 2‬ﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ)ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ (1‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻓﻌـﻞ ﻳـﺎ ﻗﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻻﻟﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬

‫‪ + Have+p.p‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ :Should have P.P‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ : Shouldn't have P.P‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ :Could have P.P‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ :Might have P.P‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Must have P.P‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Prefer‬ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ‪) I prefer‬ﻳﺎﻫﺮﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻳﺎﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭﻳﺎﻓﻌﻞ ‪ing‬ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ (‬

‫‪I prefer chicken to fish‬‬

‫‪Swimming‬‬

‫‪I, d rather‬‬ ‫‪stand‬‬

‫‪That’s he went with them.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ‪ rather‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪،‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ to‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬
‫?‪Would you prefer tea or coffee‬‬
‫?‪To take a taxi or walk‬‬

‫‪٩٢‬‬
 .‫ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬to ‫ ﻳﺎﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ‬would+ ‫ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬prefer‫ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬

‫ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬had better
You had better (not)go there.
. ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬to ‫ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬had better ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬

Am/is/are familiar with ‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

. ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬with , familiar ‫ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬: ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‬

: ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻭﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬:‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬

Be + the same as ‫ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‬-

Similar to /like + ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬
Different from

The chair is the same as that chair.

Your bag is similar to/like my bag.
Your shirt is different from mine.
. ‫ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‬from ,different‫ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ‬:‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬

Be + the same
Similar/alike
Different
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‬

These chairs are the same.

Our bags are similar /alike.
Our shirts are different.

My new coat … my old one.

A)similar B)alike C) different * D) similar to

٩٣
 ‫‪Like , alike , unlike‬‬

‫‪ : Unlike ,like‬ﻫﺮﺩﻭﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ Like‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‪ unlike‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻏﻴﺮﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ Unlike‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻭﻳﺎﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻱ ﻭﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨـﺎﻱ ﺗـﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ‪ alike‬ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ tobe‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻧﻤﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫)‪(unlike/alike‬‬ ‫‪blue asbestos‬‬

‫ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ‪ alike‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫‪Both blue and brown asbestos are‬‬ ‫)‪(like/alike‬‬

‫‪Radon (like/alike) radium is radioactive.‬‬

‫‪Other / the other / another‬‬

‫‪:Another‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ )ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫‪:Other‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ ) ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ( ﺩﺭﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ : The other‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ )ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ( ﺩﺭﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٤‬‬
 :‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
1- He is very tired. He ……two hours ago.
1.should work 2.must work
3. should have worked * 4. must have worked

2-I,m hungry, I…….lunch an hour ago.

1.should eat *2.should have eaten 3.must eat 4.must have eaten

3-After the accident the boy was immediately taken to hospital.

He ……..injured
1.should be * 2.must have been 3.must be 4.should have been

4-He had a car accident last nigh. He……driving carelessly.

1.should be 2.should have been * 3.must have been 4.must be

5-I………to Grand Hotel when I was in Ahwaz, but I went to Palace

Hotel.
1.could go *2.could have gone 3. must go 4.must have gone

‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮﺑﺴﭙﺎﺭﻳﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬

Mustn't have P.p

.‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‬can,t have p.p‫ﺍﺻﻼً ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ‬.

To be+ ‫ﺻﻔﺖ‬+to ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‬

to ‫ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯﺻـﻔﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻣﻌﻤـﻮﻻً ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ‬to be ‫ﺍﮔﺮﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ‬
.‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
It is easy to speak French
.‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‬

٩٥
 ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺑﺎ ‪+to‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ‪+for+‬ﺻﻔﺖ‪to be+‬‬

‫‪It is easy for me to speak French.‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪It is necessary ……water.‬‬
‫‪1.drink‬‬ ‫‪2.drinking‬‬ ‫‪* 3.to drink‬‬ ‫‪4.drank‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﺯﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﻴﺰﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪So that-In order that‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ so that‬ﻭ ‪ in order that‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ »ﺗﺎﺍﻳﻨﻜـﻪ« ﺑﺎﻳﺪﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﻛﺎﻣـﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪.‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﺍﺯﺟﻤﻠـﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺩﻭﻃﺮﻑ ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪so that‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ in order that‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻧـﺪ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪﺍﺯﻧﻈﺮﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻜـﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪،‬ﺑﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰﺑﺎﻳﺪﺍﺯﻓﻌﻞﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣـﺎﻝ)‪( will/can‬‬
‫ﺍﺳـــﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩﻭﻟـــﻲ ﺍﮔﺮﻃـــﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮔﺬﺷـــﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـــﺪ ﺩﺭﻃـــﺮﻑ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰﺑﺎﻳـــﺪ ﺍﺯﺍﻓﻌـــﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﻤﻜـــﻲ ﮔﺬﺷـــﺘﻪ‬
‫)‪(could/would‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪Will/can‬‬
‫‪So that‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪in order that +‬‬
‫‪In Would/could‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫‪I go home so that I can visit him.‬‬

‫‪I went home so that I could visit him.‬‬

‫‪٩٦‬‬
 ‫‪In order to‬‬
‫‪So as to‬‬
‫‪To‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻱ » ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ « ﻳﺎ » ﺗﺎﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ « ﺑﻜﺎﺭﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻭﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺲ‬
‫ﺍﺯﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪So That‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‪+‬‬
‫‪In Order that‬‬

‫‪In Order to‬‬

‫‪to‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪+‬‬
‫‪So as to‬‬

‫‪٩٧‬‬
 :‫ﺗﺴﺖ‬
1-I need some money ………buy a good car.
1.so that *2.to 3.in order that 4.for
2-I hurried……….I could get the train.
1.in order 2.so as * 3.so that 4.to
3-wear glasses……..see me better.
*1.so as to 2.so that 3.inorder 4.in order that
4-I got an umbrella so that I…..get wet.
1.won,t *2.wouldn,t 3.can,t 4.hadn,t
5-They are taking a taxi so that they………get there on time.
1.would 2.could * 3.can 4.had to
6-I sent them some money in order……they could live comfortably.
1.to 2.for 3.as *4.that
7-He exercises every day…….keep. healthy.
*1.so as to 2.so that 3.in order that 4.for
8-she is wearing dark glasses………the sun won't hurt her eyes.
1.so as to 2.for 3.to * 4.in order that
9-I need some information…….this job.
1.in order that do * 2.to do 3.so that do 4.do
10-I,m just leaving ……I can get the bus.
1.so as to 2.to * 3.so that 4.in order to
11-………he is rich, he doesn't enjoy his life.
1.whether 2.since 3.Although 4.when
12-some countries are rich ,…….others are poor.
1…. 2.therfore 3.whereas 4.since
13-……..some people know only their native language others are able to speak
many languages.
1.whether 2.since 3.As 4.while
14-……..he wasn't hungry, he ate a big meal.
1.Although 2.Unless 3.Even 4.while
15-He doesn't know the answer….I've told him several times.
1.because 2.as 3.although 4.since
16-some of the students are fat…….others are thin.
1.so 2.unless 3.whereas 4.until
17-They are enjoying the mild weather of that region,……..we live in a very
…place.

٩٨
1.whereas 2.since 3.because 4.whether
18-…………he was a computer engineer, he didn,t know how to operate on it.
1.since 2.Because 3.Though 4.whether
19-she arrived on time ……she lost her way twice.
1.therefore 2.because 3.though 4.so
20-The first service is free,………the second costs 100 dollars.
1.theerefore 2.since 3.while 4.as

٩٩
 ‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ‬

1-she has to leave here, and…….we.

1.so have 2. so do 3. neither do 4.do too
2-There is no money here to spend,…….?
1.is it 2. isn't it 3. is there 4. isn't there
3-she always makes others…..to her boring stories.
1.to listen 2.listening 3.listened 4.listen
4-Did you turn off the radio? Yes, I turned………..
1.offf it 2. if off 3.off them 4. them off
5-I asked my parents…..our house.
1.change 2.changing 3.changed 4. to change
6-They left home early so that they ……arrive on time.
1.could 2.will 3.can 4.may
7-she made the boys……early.
1.sleep 2. to sleep 3.sleeping 4.slept
8-The door was open. some one ……have forgotten to close it.
1.should 2.could 3.will 4.might
9-He was very hungry. He…..lunch half an hour ago.
1.1.should eat 2. must eat
3. could have eaten 4.must have eaten
10-He had many accidents. He ….more carefully.
1.could drive 2.must drive
3.could have driven 4.must have eaten
11-Idon,t know exactly where Hamid is .He…..have gone to school.
1.should 2. could 3.might 4.must
12-He had a bad cold. He…….have gone out without warm clothes.
1.couldn,t 2.shouldn,t 3.mustn,t 4.should
13-why is he still at home? He…..have gone to school by now.
1.should 2.must 3.might 4.may
14-Mary didn,t go to school yesterday .she…..have been sick.
1.could 2.should 3. must 4. might
15-I,m not sure why he left here. He have been angry with me.
1.might 2.must 3.could 4.shouuld
16-why didn,t you lock the door when you left home?
Home one …have come in and stolen every thing.
1.should 2.must 3.could 4. would

١٠٠
17-Ali didn,t go out last night, so he…have had an accident at that time.
1.shouldn,t 2.mustn,t 3.can,t 4.won,t
18-The car wasn't in the yard. Some one ….have taken it out.
1.must 2.should 3. could 4.would

١٠١
‫‪ 150‬ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ‬

‫‪١٠٢‬‬
 ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪other +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ‪another +‬‬ ‫‪–1‬‬
‫‪ opposite‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬
‫‪be‬‬ ‫‪used to + ing‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪used to +‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ do‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ing‬ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–5‬‬
‫‪ that – 6‬ﻭ ‪ which‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ‪ what‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪so many +‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪many +‬‬ ‫‪–7‬‬
‫‪ + than‬ﺍﺳﻢ ) ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ( ‪much more +‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ should‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭ ‪ing‬‬ ‫‪-8‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ – 9‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ to‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Let, make, see, hear, smell, watch,‬‬
‫‪He lets me go out.‬‬
‫‪He made me study English.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ can ،will‬ﻳﺎ ‪ should‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪– 10‬‬
‫‪ for – 11‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ + have/ has + 3 + for +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ one of‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-12‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-13‬‬
‫‪ + er + Than‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺑﻲ ‪much +‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪– 14‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ just‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪– 15‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ stop‬ﻭ ‪ enjoy‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪– 16‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ would rather‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪– 17‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ had better‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪– 18‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ so‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﻳﻢ‪think, reckon, guess, suppose, imagine, :‬‬ ‫‪– 19‬‬
‫‪hope‬‬
‫‪ – 20‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ + whom +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬

‫‪١٠٣‬‬
 ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + who +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ + Which‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء‬
‫‪ -21‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪: Whole , Entire , All‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Whole , Entire‬ﻣـﻲ ﺁﻳـﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ، All‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -22‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ fe‬ﻳﺎ ‪ f‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ fe ،‬ﻳﺎ ‪ f‬ﺑﻪ ‪ ves‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Life → lives‬‬
‫‪Thief → thieves‬‬
‫‪ -23‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﺧﺒﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪).‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ(‬
‫"‪Ali said: " I will work‬‬
‫‪I will work. said Ali.‬‬
‫‪ -24‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ing form‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ )ﺑﺎ ‪ (to‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cease- Prefer- Continue- Hate- Love- Like- Began- Start.‬‬
‫‪ ،News -25‬ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺧﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ a piece of‬ﻳﺎ ‪ an item of‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -26‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪ less : less , fewer‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ‪ fewer‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -27‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪The Iranian- The Chinese.‬‬
‫‪ -28‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ، to , so as to , in order to‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ )ﺑﺎ ‪ (to‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Scientists have taught chimpanzees to speak to people in sign language.‬‬
‫‪ -29‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪ ، Spend , Find‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪Ing‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Spend / Find‬‬ ‫‪Ing form‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‪+‬‬
‫‪I spend more time in Iran trying to find another car.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ ing‬ﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪– 30‬‬
‫‪ already‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-31‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ both…. and‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–32‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + and +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪both +‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ + and +‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪both +‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + and +‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪both +‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ + and +‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪both +‬‬

‫‪١٠٤‬‬
 ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ ing‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﮔﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–33‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–34‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ‪ and‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫‪–35‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ consist‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ of‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-36‬‬
‫‪ like‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ‪ a like‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-37‬‬
‫‪ depend‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ on‬ﻳﺎ ‪ upon‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–38‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻏﻠﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪–39‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺻﻔﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻣﺪ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ s‬ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ( ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -40‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﺟﻤﻠـﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ not‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪None → any‬‬ ‫‪Nothing → anything‬‬
‫‪No one → any one‬‬ ‫‪Nobody → anybody‬‬
‫‪Neither … nor‬‬ ‫‪→ Either … or‬‬
‫‪Nowhere → Anywhere‬‬
‫‪She is not afraid of anybody.‬‬
‫‪ -41‬ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌـﺎﻝ ‪can , must , may , shall , will , could , should , would , might , have‬‬
‫‪ to , has to , had to‬ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ to‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ s form‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Mary can speak English very well.‬‬
‫‪ -42‬ﺗﺎﻛﻴﺪ ‪ every‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ‪ any‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣـﻲ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨـﻲ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴـﺪ ﻣـﻲ ﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ‪ every‬ﺑـﻪ ‪any‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Scientists agree that any culture must.‬‬
‫‪Include the use of symbols.‬‬
‫‪ -43‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ hundred , thousand , million , billion‬ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﻧﻮﺷـﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ ﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ of‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Millions of years ago.‬‬
‫‪ -44‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ -‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪(If clause‬‬

‫‪١٠٥‬‬
 ‫ﺏ‪ -‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ )‪(Main clause‬‬
‫)ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ(‬
‫‪ -45‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ +‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪If +‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ + will + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪If you study more , you will get a good mark.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪If you study more : If clause‬‬
‫‪You will get a good mark : Main clause‬‬
‫‪ -46‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ +‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪If +‬‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ‪ (Simple past tense) :‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ + would + to‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫‪If you studied more , you would get good mark.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪If you study more : If clause‬‬
‫‪You will get a good mark : Main clause‬‬
‫‪ -47‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ to be‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺿﻤﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ‪ were‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪If I were here , he would help us.‬‬
‫‪ -48‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ +‬ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ‪If +‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ( ‪ + had + P.P‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺿﻲ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ( ‪ + would + have + P.P‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫‪If you had come , you would have seen them.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻳﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪If you had come : If clause‬‬
‫‪You would have seen them : Main clause‬‬
‫‪ -49‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺑﻲ )ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ( ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ er‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Taller . Faster.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ those‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ that‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-50‬‬

‫‪١٠٦‬‬
 ‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ‪ were‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺘﻲ )‪ (I, he, she, it‬ﻭ ‪was‬‬ ‫‪–51‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ where‬ﻭ ‪ in which‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–52‬‬
‫)ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + who +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ (‬ ‫‪-53‬‬
‫)ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ + whom +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ (‬
‫)‪ + which‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء‬
‫) ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + whose +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ (‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ‪so….as :‬‬ ‫‪as…as‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪–54‬‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ( ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ + need + ing‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء‬ ‫‪ -55‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪in +‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ + need + to‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫)ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ( ‪ + need + to be + 3‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء‬ ‫‪-56‬‬
‫‪ and –57‬ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ and‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ but‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺗﻀﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪–58‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ every‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–59‬‬
‫‪ -60‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻼﺑﻲ ) ﺩﻭﺑﺨﺸﻲ( ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺧـﺘﻢ ﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑـﻪ ﻭﺳـﻴﻠﻪ ‪ er‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻔﺖ ﺗﻔـﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Le – er – ow – y.‬‬
‫‪Simpler‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ more‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪More useful‬‬
‫‪ -61‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻴﻼﺑﻲ )ﺳﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ( ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ more‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪More important‬‬
‫‪ -62‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪: between , among‬‬
‫‪ Between‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ‪ among‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪between two chairs.‬‬
‫‪I am among my friend.‬‬
‫‪ -63‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ ، C‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪ e – y- I‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻆ ‪ /s/C‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ceramist-Police-Society‬‬
‫‪ -64‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪: because , because of‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ because‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪because‬‬
‫‪ of‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٧‬‬
I came here because I wanted to see you .
I came here because of the interesting book.
: when , while ‫ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬-65
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜـﻪ ﺑﻌـﺪ‬.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‬when ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬،‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩ‬while ‫ﺍﺯ‬
I was working when you came here.
You came here while I was working.
.‫ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‬-66
(interesting) Ing Form (‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬
(interested) (ed) ‫ﺏ( ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ‬
.‫ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬Ing Form ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
I was bored last night.
The film was interesting.
.‫ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‬Ing Form ‫ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬،‫ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬-67
I use internet for sending message.
Raze psssed the test by studying.
:‫ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‬-68
First → Then → Next → After that
Finally
First, put charcoal.
Then, cut up some meat.
Next, put the meat on the skewer.
After that, put kebabs on the barbecue.
Finally, take the kebabs off.
: as well , too , either , also ‫ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬-69
.‫ﻫﻤﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
.‫ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‬also ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ‬
.‫ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬either ‫ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ‬as well , too
They also learn their country's customs.
Mary is clever. Ali is too.
Mary is not clever. Ali is not either.
.‫ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ago ‫ ﻭ‬yesterday, last – 70
.‫ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬at present, now -71
As, while, when .‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ –72
.‫ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

١٠٨
 ‫‪ after , before‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪-73‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪tomorrow, next :‬‬ ‫‪–74‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ had better, would rather, make , let‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–75‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ ( made) make‬ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪–76‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻪ ‪ make‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ make‬ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ make‬ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ to‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ help‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪-77‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪I wish‬‬ ‫‪-78‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ wish‬ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺝ ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ) ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ I wish‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩ( ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ was‬ﺍﺯ ‪ were‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺏ ﺍﺯ ‪ er‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺏ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪more‬‬ ‫‪–79‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ than‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻼﺏ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ than‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ ) very‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ( ﺍﺯ ‪much‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) -80‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ( ‪Wish + past tense‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺭﺯﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ ، wish‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺴﻮﺱ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺮﺕ(‬
‫‪I wish he had some free time.‬‬
‫‪ -81‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺑـﺮ ﺯﻣـﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷـﺘﻪ ﺩﻻﻟـﺖ ﻛﻨـﺪ‪) ،‬ﻣﺜـﻞ ‪last night ,‬‬
‫… ‪ (last week , yesterday‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪) .‬ﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ(‬
‫‪I saw a good film yesterday.‬‬
‫‪ -82‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ‪ fast , slow‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪My watch is two minutes slow.‬‬

‫‪١٠٩‬‬
 ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪My watch is five minutes fast.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻦ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -83‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ، help‬ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ )ﺑﺎ ‪ (to‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ to‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪I help him to learn / learn Persian.‬‬
‫‪ -84‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ as thought , as if‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -85‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ‪:real‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤـﻼﺕ ‪ real‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪They must have come from Iran.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ must‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ real‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -86‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ‪: unreal‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻼﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤـﻼﺕ ‪ unreal‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴـﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪I ought to have gone there.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ ought to‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ unreal‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -87‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ‪ unreal‬ﻗﻴﺪ ‪ but‬ﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪We could have gone to Tehran but we didn't.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ could‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ‪ unreal‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ no one -88‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ he , she , It‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ s form‬ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪No one knows when they will go off.‬‬
‫)‪(Go off = explode‬‬
‫‪ -89‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪ an , a , the‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪I have no money to buy a house.‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ‪I have no money to buy house.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﻼﺏ ﺍﺯ ‪ est‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻼﺏ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ most‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫‪–90‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ the‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪the, in, of all, ever :‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ the‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ as…. as‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ‬ ‫‪–91‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ as‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ so‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ‪ to be‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪–92‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –93‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + and +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ‪ + but +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫‪ –94‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ‪ + but +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫‪ –95‬ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ +‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ +‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ‬
‫‪ –96‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ‪ + because +‬ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫‪ –97‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ notonly, only, no sooned, hardly,never‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –98‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ‪ ing‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪ to be‬ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ‪ ed‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪–99‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ‪and, but, or, so, yet :‬‬ ‫‪- 100‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﺎً ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -101‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪in as much as, since, because, now that, as‬‬ ‫ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪once, as, until, whenever, while, when, before, after, since, by‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪:‬‬
‫‪the time, as long as‬‬
‫‪ -102‬ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ‪:‬‬
‫‪wher ever‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪where :‬‬
‫‪in that‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪as :‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﺎﺩ ‪where as, while, though, even though, although :‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺷﺮﻁ ‪whether, unless, providing, provided, in case, if :‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺳﺒﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١١‬‬
 ‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ‪ have‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ ( have, has, had, having‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪–103‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪. ed‬‬
‫‪ –104‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ be‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﻥ)‪ ( Am, is, are, was, were, be, been, being‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ )‪ (ing‬ﻳﺎ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺻﻔﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ)‪ (ed‬ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ will‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ ( might, must, would, can, could, may‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫‪-105‬‬
‫ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–106‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–107‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-108‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ‪ +‬ﺑﺪﻝ‬ ‫*****‬ ‫ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ +‬ﺑﺪﻝ ‪ +‬ﻓﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫‪ -109‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﺪﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -110‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ )‪ (ies) ،(es) ،(s‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻤـﻊ ﺑـﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪(Irregular plurals).‬‬
‫‪Max → Men , Woman → Women‬‬
‫‪Ox → Oxen , Foot → Feet‬‬
‫‪Child → Children , Mouse → Mice‬‬
‫‪Goose → Geese , Tooth → Teeth‬‬
‫‪ -111‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﻳﮕـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ else‬ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤـﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Everybody . any body , anything‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪It is simpler than anything else.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -112‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ The‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺁﺳﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪The moon- the sun- the earth – the sky.‬‬
‫‪I saw a bird in the sky.‬‬
‫‪ -113‬ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(Ever-never-always-often-seldom-soon-sometime‬‬
‫‪I always go to school by taxi.‬‬
‫‪ -114‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ enough‬ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪We have enough food for two people.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻏﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ )ﺻﻔﺖ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻥ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪The room is large enough for me.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٢‬‬
 ‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪: Writing‬‬
‫‪ -115‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺼﻮﺕ )ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ( ﻛـﻪ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻳـﻚ ﺻـﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫)ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Sad + -est = saddest‬‬
‫‪Sit + -ing = sitting‬‬
‫‪ -116‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨـﺶ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻـﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﺎﻳـﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺨـﺶ ﺁﺧـﺮ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺗﻜـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Prefer + -ed = preferred‬‬
‫‪Begin + -ing = beginning‬‬
‫‪ -117‬ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﻮﺕ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ e‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨـﻴﻢ‪e ،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪Take + -ing = taking‬‬
‫‪Write + -ing = writing‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ e‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪ g , c‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ e‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Notice + -able = noticeable‬‬
‫‪ -118‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ y‬ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ y‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ i‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Mystery + -ous = mysterious‬‬
‫‪ -119‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ‪ s‬ﺳﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ i‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ‪ es‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﺧـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Cry + -s = cries‬‬
‫‪Sky + -s = skies‬‬
‫‪ -120‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ y‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ y‬ﻳﻚ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺻﺪﺍﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ y ،‬ﺑﻌـﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓـﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Boy + -ish = boyish‬‬
‫‪Enjoy + -ing = enjoying‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Day + -ly = daily‬‬
‫‪Pay + -ed = paid‬‬
‫‪Say + -ed = said‬‬
‫‪Lay + -ed = laid‬‬

‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ‪ or, and :‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ but‬ﻭ ‪yet‬‬ ‫‪–121‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﻭ ‪ so‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٣‬‬
 ‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻛﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﺎﻣﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬

‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ a ، make‬ﻳﺎ ‪ an‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩ ﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﮕﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪make use of :‬‬ ‫‪-122‬‬
‫‪ –123‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ a ، do‬ﻭ ‪ an‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪do a kindness,‬‬ ‫‪do a service,‬‬ ‫‪do a assignment‬‬
‫‪ -124‬ﺣﻮﺍﺳﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ a‬ﻳﺎ ‪ an‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ s‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺩﺍﻧﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪ s‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–125‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-126‬‬
‫‪Both, many, afew, several, fewer‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪–127‬‬
‫‪Another, each, every‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-128‬‬
‫‪All, a lot of, plenty of, enough, some, any, lots of, most, more‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺣﻜﻢ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ‪ s‬ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-129‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ‪ of‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ s‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-130‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﻴﺪﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪to‬‬ ‫‪-131‬‬
‫‪ be‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ (ed, s) .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪ ing‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﺶ ﻓﺎﻋﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪-132‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪whom - which - that‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪who - which - that‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ whom‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪–133‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ that - which - who‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ‪ to be‬ﻭ ‪ s‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪–134‬‬
‫‪ ed‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪ ing‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪–135‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﺳﺸﻲ ) ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ( ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ) ‪how, why, where,‬‬
‫‪.( when, what‬‬

‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﻌﻞ ‪.‬‬
‫‪in, here, there, avoune‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺎﺯ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪not, no, nor, never, neither, only, seldom, hardly, barely, scarcely‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ‪ were, should, had‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﺎﻥ ‪ is‬ﻫﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ if‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﻭﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺴﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻥ ‪should, were, had‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻪ ‪ if‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ –136‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ‪ with‬ﺍﺯ ﺿﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﻌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ‪ : the‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﭼﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﻴﺎﻩ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪-137‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻥ ﻫﺎ‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ – ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ – ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺸﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪-‬‬
‫ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ of‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ of‬ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ‪ the‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﻲ ‪ the‬ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ -‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ ‪ the‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ﺟﻨﮓ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪-138‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + er + then +‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ‪be +‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ + then +‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ‪be +‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪ + in +‬ﺍﺳﻢ‪ + est +‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ‪be + the +‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪ + in +‬ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ +‬ﺻﻔﺖ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ‪be + the + most +‬‬

‫ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ er, le, ly, y‬ﻭ ‪ ow‬ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ 1‬ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪est, er).‬‬ ‫‪-139‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ )‪ er‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (more‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪less‬‬ ‫‪-140‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ )‪ er‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (more‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪the less‬‬ ‫‪-141‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ very‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ much‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-142‬‬

‫‪١١٥‬‬
 ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ more‬ﻫﺴﺖ ) ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪–143‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺟﻤﻊ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﻛﻢ ﺗﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ‪less‬‬
‫ﺏ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺟﻤﻊ ‪ fewer‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -144‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﺩ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺍﻱ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ : enthier‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.......‬‬ ‫‪Or‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪neithe‬‬ ‫‪…..‬‬ ‫‪NOr‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻤﻊ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪both‬‬ ‫‪…..‬‬ ‫‪and‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪ : not only …..‬ﺟﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪But also‬‬ ‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪: whether‬‬ ‫……‬ ‫‪Or‬‬ ‫‪.5‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ )‪ 5‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ( ﺑﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -145‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺖ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ing ،to‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ will‬ﺍﺯ ‪must, may,‬‬ ‫‪-146‬‬
‫‪ can‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ was‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ were‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ huve to‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ to‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪did,‬‬ ‫‪-147‬‬
‫‪ does, do‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ used to –148‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ did‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –149‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻋﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ to‬ﻭ ‪ 90 . ing‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺎ ‪ to‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -150‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﻜﻲ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ to‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪(will, would)(can, could)(shall, should)(may, might)must‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺰﻓﻌﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪ to‬ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Would, rather, had better, have to, used to, let, make, see, watch, notice, feel,‬‬
‫‪have, listen to‬‬

‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻙ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ‬

‫‪١١٧‬‬